CMMT ST SW
CMMT ST SW
Servo drive
Description | Software,
Function, Fieldbus,
Device profile
8117802
8117802
2019-08b
[8117804]
Translation of the original instructions
The user documentation for the product also includes the following documents:
Designation Contents
Further general safety instructions for the servo drive controller can be found in the product instruc-
tion manual (Installation, Safety sub-function) è 1.1 Applicable documents.
1.4 Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
– Hexadecimal values are marked by a prefixed “0x”.
– Parameters and diagnostic messages are identified by prefixed letters:
– Parameter (P … )è 3.2.1 Depiction of the parameters
– Diagnostic messages (D … )è 9.4.2 Structure of Messages
– Objects assigned to the parameters are displayed according to the device profile used; e. g.,
objects according to CiA 402 are shown as hexadecimal values with index and subindex
è 3.2.3 Depiction of the Objects Specific to the Device Profile
2 CMMT-ST Plug-in
2.1 CMMT-ST Getting to know the plug-in
2.1.1 Overview
Function
The CMMT-ST plug-in is integrated in the Festo Automation Suite, enabling parameterisation, commis-
sioning, diagnostics and manual control of servo drives from the range. CMMT-STThe plug-in can be
loaded and used in a Festo Automation Suite project.
When inserting Festo components, the component-specific parameters are copied from a device dir-
ectory (database) and do not have to be entered. The application-specific parameters are entered by
the user. This applies to all components within the drive configuration. The plug-in keeps the data
automatically synchronised. Entries added to the plug-in are immediately transferred to the device if
there is an existing device connection è 2.1.5 Automatic data synchronisation
Functions of the Festo Automation Suite
The installation, update, deinstallation and language switchover of the plug-in is managed in Festo
Automation Suite. If a text in the plug-in is not available in the selected language, it switches back to
the standard language – English. Projects that contain the devices are also managed via the Festo
Automation Suite. è Online help for Festo Automation Suite.
Device parameter record
The device parameter record (user parameter record) is part of the project and is managed with the
project in Festo Automation Suite.
Unsaved changes are marked with “*” behind the project name in the title line. The "Save" or "Save
as" function of Festo Automation Suite saves the parameter sets with the project. The default project
file in the program options is recommended as the default storage location. The default path is
"%USERPROFILE%\Documents\Festo Automation Suite Projects".
A project can be stored anywhere in the file system:
– by entering a different directory in the program options or when saving the file
– by subsequent, manual moving within the file system
Recommendation: Archive completed projects so that the parameter record is available if the device is
replaced. Standard mechanisms can be used, such as the creation of a ZIP archive. After unpacking,
the archived project can be opened again in the suite.
2.1.2 Interface
2.1.2.1 Overview
2.1.2.2 Contexts
Functions and commands contained in the plug-in are divided into contexts. Contexts support the
phases in which the user uses the plug-in to commission and optimise the servo drive. The corres-
ponding function is displayed in the working area by clicking on a context. The content of the toolbar
and sidebar are adjusted to the relevant context that is selected.
Context Description
2.1.2.3 Toolbar
Overview
The toolbar contains frequently used commands:
– Context-independent standard commands and sections, e.g. for connection control, error acknow-
ledgement or re-initialisation
– Context-dependent commands for the contexts:
– è Toolbar"Parameterisation"
– è Toolbar"Control"
– è Toolbar"Diagnosis"
1 Functions:
– Connect the plug-in to a device.
Connection Control – Display the current connection and device status.
– Manage the plug-in communication settings.
Additional information
è 2.2.2.1 Connection Control.
2 Function:
– Assign the master control to the plug-in or higher-
"Control" level controller.
Note:
– The scroll bar shows the current setting.
Requirements:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– No other plug-in has the master control.
5 Requirements:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– The plug-in has the master control.
"Acknowledge all"
6 Function:
– Permanently save the current parameterisation on
the device.
"Store on device"
Requirement:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
7 Function:
– Re-initialising the device
Information:
"Reinitialize" – If the function for accepting changed device para-
meters must be executed, the button is highlighted
optically
– The reinitialisation will update the device paramet-
ers, but not save them.
Requirements:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– The device parameters that required a reinitialisa-
tion have been changed.
– Controller enable is deactivated.
8 Function:
– Reinitialisation and restart of the device
Information:
"Restart device" – If the function for accepting changed device para-
meters must be executed, the button is highlighted
optically.
– If the command is executed, a selection dialogue
offers the following options:
– "Store and restart":è The data is saved on the
device before the restart.
– "Restart device only"è The device is restarted
without saving the data.
Requirement:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
Tab. 3 Context-Independent Sections and Toolbar Commands
2.1.2.4 Navigator
For selection in the navigator, all content screens of the selected context are displayed in a navigation
tree. Selected content screens are displayed in the working area. è Working Area in the Title Bar.
Symbol Description
Tab. 4 Description of the Symbols in the Title Bar of the Working Area
Depending on the content screen selected, further commands are visible in the title bar, e.g.:
Only the display of errors and warnings of the plug-in is described here.
Messages from the device are displayed here:
• Toolbar è 2.1.2.3 Toolbar
• Diagnostics context è 2.5.2.
Display of errors and warnings on the parameter, diagnostic and control screens
Errors and warnings are indicated by the corresponding colour coding of the adorner and the frame.
2.1.2.8 Adorner
Overview
Adorners provide additional information for parameters. If the cursor is moved over the adorner, a
pop-up window with the additional information opens.
Surface
Button Description
Button Description
"Last saved" Resets the device parameter to the most recently saved value in the
project.
Tab. 6 Buttons for Value Change
If the adorner has an input field, its border has the same colour as the adorner.
If the values of corresponding parameters are not consistent, the corresponding parameter screens
can be called up using a button in the adorner.
Case Description
General
F1 Open online help for plug-in.
Tab Access next input field, next checkbox or next button.
Ctrl + Tab Access previous input field, previous checkbox or previous button.
Space bar Activate or deactivate activated checkboxes.
Actuate activated buttons.
Parameter panels
Ctrl + F6 Switch between graphical and tabular display.
Additional information è Title Bar of the Working Area.
Parameter panels (tabular display)
Ctrl + L Show/hide all of the filters è Title Bar of the Working Area.
Ctrl + F Switch to search field in title bar of the working area
è Title Bar of the Working Area.
– "Start first setup..." to open the initial commissioning assistant, which guides the user through
the most important steps in parameterisation.
– "Manual setup..." for customised input of parameters, starting with the parameter panel for drive
configuration.
If an option is selected, an overlay dialogue is not displayed next time the plug-in is opened.
Connection Status
The connection status between plug-in and device is indicated by the following symbols:
During an active device connection, the "Device state" diagnostic panel displays the current status of
the servo drive and axis and the message directory. The button "Show details" in the pop-up displays
the diagnostic panel "Device state" in the working area.
Information
Warning
Error
Requirements:
– The device communication dialogue is open.
– Devices were found in the network.
1. Click on the required device with the right mouse button.
2. Select "Change _Device Name".
The network settings of different devices can vary depending on the specific device.
Requirements:
– The device communication dialogue is open.
– Devices were found in the network.
1. Click on the required device with the right mouse button.
2. Select "Change _Network Settings".
Ä The current network settings are displayed.
3. Change the network settings.
– "DHCP" activated: The dynamic assignment of the IP address is activated. This is only per-
missible if a DHCP server is available in the network. If DHCP is activated, the following set-
tings (subnet mask, gateway and DNS) are greyed out.
– "DHCP" deactivated: The network settings implemented in the following lines are applied.
4. Press the "Apply" button.
5. If the device needs to be restarted, a message appears:
– Exclude any hazards caused by the behaviour of the machine when restarting.
– Then confirm the displayed message with "Ok".
Ä The network settings are changed.
6. NOTICE!
Ensure that any unpredictable behaviour by the device cannot cause any damage. Confirm mes-
sage with "Ok".
Ä The network settings are changed.
If other devices are already connected to the device, the plug-in shows the following information when
the connection is established:
• IP address and TCP port of the other devices
• Connection ID for identification of the master control
The connection can then be optionally established or cancelled.
If the device is a CODESYS controller, a connection is also automatically established with CODESYS.
Before the plug-in establishes a connection, a check is completed to determine whether the firmware
is compatible with the current version of the plug-in. If the firmware is not compatible, no connection
to the servo drive is established.
The connection status is updated. As long as the connection is established, the data is automatically
synchronised.
Disconnecting the Device
If the connection is disconnected, parameter changes are lost after a power failure or restart.
The "Disconnect" button is visible in the toolbar when the plug-in is connected to a device.
To disconnect the connection:
1. Press the "Disconnect" button
2. Before the plug-in disconnects, it checks whether parameter changes need to be saved.
Select the appropriate option:
– Cancel the disconnection process to save parameter changes on the device, or
– Continue the disconnection process without saving the changes.
Action Description
Action Description
If device parameter values are changed during the existing connection, these are transferred to the
device è 2.1.5 Automatic data synchronisation.
Action Description
Action Description
– If all parameters are valid in the project and the data does not match that of the device, deviating
parameters between the device and project are displayed. The configuration can optionally be
read from the device or written to the device
When writing the configuration from the project to the device, all writeable parameters are trans-
ferred from the project to the device. The units used in the project and on the device are checked.
If the units differ, a synchronisation and re-initialisation are carried out:
– The units saved in the project are written to the device.
– The parameter set is saved.
– The device runs a re-initialisation.
If the data deviates between the project and the device, a query in the plug-in offers the following
actions for synchronisation:
2.2.3.1 Overview
The drive components are selected and configured in the initial commissioning assistant. The settings
for the application data, hardware switches, homing and software end positions are also implemented
here.
The initial commissioning assistant can be operated if the following prerequisite is met:
– The plug-in is not connected to a device.
The initial commissioning assistant is started via the "Start first setup..." button in the toolbar.
1 Header with selection of the commissioning 3 Finishes initial commissioning and closes
steps the assistant
2 Drive configuration start panel in the initial 4 Continue with the next commissioning step
commissioning assistant 5 Back to the previous commissioning step
Fig. 8 Initial commissioning assistant start panel
The Configuring drive panel is displayed first. The following steps can only be edited when the drive
configuration is complete. If the "Configuring drive" configuration panel has been completed, all of
the panels can be processed in any order.
Page Use
Page Use
"Homing method" Selected settings for the homing run, e.g., meth-
od è Setting the Homing
At the end of the initial commissioning assistant, changes are applied directly to the project and dis-
played in the "Parameterisation" context on the applicable screens
Operation of the "Drive configuration" parameter screen of the initial commissioning assistant and
the "Parameterisation" context is identical. Changes in the parameterisation are automatically
applied in both panels.
The "Drive configuration" parameter panel can only be operated if the following prerequisite is met:
– The plug-in is not connected to a device.
The drive components in use are selected and configured in the drive configuration. A drive is fully
configured with the following drive components:
– Servo drive
– Motor
– Axis
– Mounting kit
One or more gear units can be optionally selected.
Drive components that cannot be removed are marked with a tool tip, e.g.:
• Servo drive
• automatically added drive components
Automatically added drive components cannot be individually removed but only in combination with
the associated axis or axis-motor combination.
– Gear unit after selection of an axis-motor combination with integrated gear unit
– Motor and mounting kit after selection of a Festo axis-motor combination
Automatically added components are shown in the selection dialogue and are marked with a tool tip.
Previously selected single components are overwritten at the same time. Integrated components are
shown by symbols in the drive configuration overview.
Automatically added drive components cannot be edited. The output components cannot be individu-
ally removed but only in combination with the associated axis or axis-motor combination.
Status of Drive Components
The plug-in automatically checks whether the selected drive components are compatible and that the
configuration is complete. Incompatible drive components are marked with a warning symbol:
Symbol Description
Notes on Parameterisation
After selection of the drive components, additional application-specific parameters for the configured
drive components can be set or displayed in the plug-in. Additional information on drive configuration
and the application-specific parameterisation è 3.3 Drive Configuration
Component Parameterisation
Component Parameterisation
Parameter Comments
Rotative axis —
Rotative axis
Tab. 26 Mounting Positions of the Motor and Direction of Load Movement (Without Reversing the Dir-
ection of Rotation)
The direction of movement of load is, for example, dependent on the installation position of the
motor, the spindle type of the axis (clockwise/anti-clockwise) and the gear unit used. Reversing the
direction of rotation can be advantageous when angular or toothed belt gear units are used.
The reversal of the direction of rotation is activated:
– by clicking the arrow
– using the checkbox below the interactive graphic
During commissioning:
• Check the direction of rotation/direction of travel of the drive, e.g., by jogging.
• Optional: Activate/deactivate reversal of direction of rotation.
• After changing the reversal of the direction of rotation: Carry out the homing again.
Motor Cable
The following parameters for the motor cable are set in this parameter group:
– Length of motor cable (Px.1206)
– Cable cross-section (Px.1208)
The setting is also possible on the side "X-axis", "Closed loop" as an option.
Parameter Comments
Reference switch Defines the function of the reference switch. The setting affects
parameter Px.101200.
Limit switches Determines the switching function of both limit switches. The set-
ting of the switching function affects the two parameters
Px.101100 and Px.101101. The configuration of the inputs affects
the parameters Px.11201 and Px.11202.
Tab. 28 Information on the Parameters
Additional information about digital inputs and outputs è 2.3.6.
Setting Description
Referencing method (Px.8417.0.0) Selection of the method for homing the drive.
Setting Description
Move to axis zero point after homing (Px.841.0.0) Specifies whether the drive is to move to the axis
zero-point after homing.
Nominal current limit value scaling factor Specifies the limit value for stop detection. The
(Px.8414.0.0) scaling factor refers to the nominal value of the
motor current.
Tab. 29 Setting the Homing
If a homing method is selected that is not consistent with other settings, such as the configuration of
the corresponding switch, the parameter is marked with a warning. The reason for the warning is dis-
played in the adorner, and a jump to the relevant parameter screen is also possible using a button.
If the software end positions are activated, the positive and negative software limit positions can be
specified via the interactive graphic or in the "Software limits"parameter group.
If the software end positions are not activated, the interactive graphic does not contain the software
limit positions and the corresponding input fields in the "Software limits"parameter group are
blocked.
Interactive Graphic
Identifier Description
Orange Warning Limit value violation is tolerated and can be loaded into the device.
Warnings should be corrected.
Red Error Limit value violations are not tolerated and cannot be loaded into the
device.
Errors must be corrected.
Tab. 31 Marking of Limit Value Violations
The parameter correction assistant offers the possibility of correcting the affected parameters to the
calculated limit values. Limit value violations that are to be corrected automatically to the calculated
limit value can be selected or deselected using the checkbox in the first column.
The checkbox in the column header of the first column can also be used for selection. This allows you
to select or deselect all parameters regardless of their previous selection status.
2.3 Parameterisation
2.3.1 Surface
Toolbar
In addition to the standard commands, the toolbar for the "Parameterisation" context also contains
the following commands:
Identifier Function
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
1) The different colours serve to provide a better overview in the tabular display and have no further significance.
Tab. 38 Colour display of possible cases
Permissible characters
The following characters are permitted for input values:
– Texts: Unicode, UTF-8.
– Whole number: numbers 0 … 9 and the minus sign.
– Decimal numbers: numbers 0 … 9, the minus sign, comma or dot.
Number formats, e. g. decimal and thousand separators are dependent on the settings of the operat-
ing system.
Invalid values
Invalid values occur in the following cases:
– The input field is empty.
– The permissible value range of numerical values has not been observed.
– Invalid characters have been entered for numerical values.
– The minimum or maximum number of characters within a text has not been observed.
Check of entries
The plug-in checks inputs and displays corresponding errors and warnings
è 2.1.2.6 Display of errors and warnings.
Identification of parameters
Some parameters contains identification marks that are displayed to the left of the input and display
panel. Parameters can contain the following identification marks:
Symbol Explanation
Any changes to this parameter only become effective following reinitialisation of the
device.
The reinitialisation cannot be completed if a parameter, that requires a reinitialisa-
tion, is modified and controller enable is activated.
If controller enable is not activated and a reinitialisation is required, controller enable
cannot be activated.
Any changes to this parameter only become effective once they have been saved and
the device has subsequently been restarted.
Restarting the device includes a reinitialisation.
Modified parameters only remain effective following a restart if they have been saved
beforehand.
Tab. 39 Description of parameter identification marks
Button Description
"Start first setup..." Closes the dialogue and starts the initial commis-
sioning assistant, which guides you through the
most important parameterisation steps.
"Manual commissioning..." Closes the dialogue and starts the manual setting
of the drive parameters.
Tab. 40 Selection for Drive Configuration
When the plug-in is opened again, manual commissioning is started automatically. The selection dia-
logue is no longer displayed. If required, the initial commissioning assistant can be started with the
"Start first setup..." button in the toolbar.
Structure of the Parameter Screen
In the working area of the parameter screen, the drive components for configuring the drive are dis-
played in an overview.
Click on a configured drive component to show additional information in the right sidebar:
– Device details, e.g. for the servo drive (device name, firmware version, product key, etc.)
– Support documents and files (user manual, application notes, device description, etc.)
If there is no connection to the device yet, initial values are displayed as device details. If there is
already a connection to the device, the device details are saved together with the project and dis-
played when the connection is established and when it is not established.
Operation of the "Drive configuration" parameter screen of the initial commissioning assistant and
the "Parameterisation" context is identical. Changes in the parameterisation are automatically
applied in both panels.
The "Drive configuration" parameter panel can only be operated if the following prerequisite is met:
– The plug-in is not connected to a device.
The drive components in use are selected and configured in the drive configuration. A drive is fully
configured with the following drive components:
– Servo drive
– Motor
– Axis
– Mounting kit
One or more gear units can be optionally selected.
Drive components that cannot be removed are marked with a tool tip, e.g.:
• Servo drive
• automatically added drive components
Automatically added drive components cannot be individually removed but only in combination with
the associated axis or axis-motor combination.
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
Notes on Parameterisation
After selection of the drive components, additional application-specific parameters for the configured
drive components can be set or displayed in the plug-in. Additional information on drive configuration
and the application-specific parameterisation è 3.3 Drive Configuration
Component Parameterisation
Component Parameterisation
Parameter Comments
2.3.5 Fieldbus
– Position
– Velocity
The scaling factor is given as a ten exponent. The servo drive calculates the corresponding parameter
values of the physical variables from the specified unit of measurement and the scaling factor.
The setting ranges of the scaling factor of the physical quantities may differ from the example given
here. Note the information in the adorners of the factor group.
Additional information on the user units è Configurable measuring units ("user unit").
Additional information on the group of factors
è Scaling of internal units for the fieldbus ("factor group").
If the device connection is active, the current connection parameters PROFINETare displayed.
The connection parameters in the subgroup "Configuration"can be changed for EtherNet/IP. If the
device connection is active, the subgroup "Active"displays the current connection parameters.
Additional information on the connection parameters for PROFINETè 12.3.4 Connection Parameters.
Additional information on the connection parameters for Ethernet/IP è 13.3.3 Connection Parameters
"Connection properties" for EtherNet/IP, PROFINET
Connection properties are defined or displayed in this parameter group, e. g.:
– PZD telegram selection for setting the receive and send telegram
– With active device connection: display of the current application class
Additional information on the connection properties for
PROFINETè 12.3.5 Connection Characteristics.
Additional information on the connection properties for Ethernet/IP
è 13.3.4 Connection Characteristics
Application Class "AC4" for PROFINET
This parameter group contains parameters for application class AC4 of PROFIdrive.
Certain parameter values must be set the same for the controller and servo drive, e. g:
– Basic value and maximum velocity (maximum)
– Number of revolutions
– Maximum torque
– Resolution per revolution for the sensor interfaces Gn_XIST (Px.231545)
è 12.4.7.7 Encoder n Actual Position Value 1 (Gn_XIST1)
To synchronise the settings:
– Note the information in the adorners of the parameters.
– Synchronise values with the configuration software of the master and, if necessary, transfer para-
meter values to the configuration software of the master (e. g. TIA Portal).
The parameterised bus cycle time of this parameter group is used for the internal, model-based con-
troller design of the KPC position controller (runtime compensation). The bus cycle time can be taken
from the configuration software of the master.
"Point to point" Devices for point-to-point operation (ID ends with "_PTP")
Every time the currently set operating mode and version are modified, the corresponding data is trans-
mitted to the connected control components.
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
Parameter Comments
X1C.02 (Input) Defines the function of the digital input signal at connection
X1C.02. The setting affects parameter Px.101200.
X1A.07 (Input) Defines the function of the digital input signal at terminal X1A.07.
The setting affects parameter Px.11201.
Tab. 49 Information on Internal Parameters
If a conflict results from assignments, this is displayed as a warning and can be resolved with com-
mand buttons in the pop-up of the corresponding adorner.
Additional information on the parameterisation of digital I/Os è 3.3.5 Digital Inputs and Outputs.
The feed constant for encoder interface 1 can be adjusted for user-defined linear axes as follows:
• in the initial commissioning assistant
• on the parameter screen Drive configuration (axis)
The feed constant corresponds to the numerator/denominator ratio of the following parameters:
– Feed constant (encoder interface 1) = Px.1194/Px.1195
A corresponding message is displayed if the calculated value has to be rounded off.
Parameter Comments
Encoder interface 1 Defines the feed constant determined by the user for encoder
interface 1. The feed constant is converted into a numerator
(Px.1194) and denominator (Px.1195) representation.
Tab. 50 Information on Internal Parameters
"Encoder 1"
The motor encoder at encoder interface 1 is displayed and configured in this parameter group. When
using Festo motors, encoder interface 1 does not need to be configured.
Additional information about encoder parameters è Encoder Parameters and Diagnostic Messages.
"Configuration of encoder 1 (BiSS-C) or Configuration of encoder 2 (incremental)"
In this parameter group, the encoder used is configured at encoder interface 1.
The displayed parameters depend on the encoder used:
– Encoder with BISS interface (Continuous Mode protocol)
– Incremental encoder
2.3.8 Axis 1
The working area contains sections with links to subordinate pages.
These are split into the following groups:
– "Drive settings"
Motor: è 2.3.8.1
Gearbox: è 2.3.8.2
Axis: è 2.3.8.3
– "Servo drive functions"
Record list: è 2.3.8.4
Monitoring functions: è 2.3.8.5
Open loop: è 2.3.8.6
Closed loop: è 2.3.8.7
Auto tuning: è 2.3.8.8
Vibration compensation: è 2.3.8.10
Feed forward control: è 2.3.8.11
Cam controller: è 2.3.8.12 Cam Controller (Position Trigger)
Touch probe: è 2.3.8.13 Position Detection (Touch Probe)
Jog mode: è 2.3.8.14
2.3.8.1 Motor
The working area contains parameter groups to display and specify the stepper motor characteristics.
"Motor (user defined configuration)" or "Motor (active configuration)"
The motor parameters are displayed and, if necessary, modified in this parameter group. For Festo
motors, the motor parameters are automatically transferred from the database upon selection of the
motor. For motors from other manufacturers, the motor parameters must be defined manually.
If the plug-in isnot connected to a device, the "Motor (user defined configuration)" parameter group is
displayed.
If the plug-in is connected to a device, the "Motor (active configuration)" parameter group is dis-
played.
Parameter Comments
Maximal peak motor torque Displays the maximum torque calculated from the maximum cur-
rent Px.7120 and the torque constant Px.7135 of the configured
motor.
Nominal motor torque Displays the nominal torque calculated from the rated current
Px.7117 and the torque constant Px.7135 of the configured motor.
EMF constant Electromotive voltage constant (Phase-Phase)
Tab. 51 Information on Internal Parameters
Additional information on the motor configuration è 3.3.1 Motor configuration.
"Holding brake 1 (motor, user configuration)"
The properties of the holding brake on the motor (holding brake 1) are specified in this parameter
group. This is necessary to take mechanical properties (inertia, time delay) into consideration.
Additional information on the brake control è 3.3.2 Brake Control.
"Holding current reduction brake one"
The holding current reduction of the holding brake is activated in this parameter group.
Further information on holding current reduction è Holding Current Reduction
"Field weakening"
The field weakening is activated in this parameter group.
Additional information on the field weakening è 7.4 Field weakening.
2.3.8.2 Gearbox
The working area contains parameter groups to display and specify the gear ratios.
"Gear 1", "Gear 2" and "Gear 3"
The transmission factors of gear units 1, 2 and 3 are displayed in these parameter groups.
"Gear ratio (total)"
The transmission factor is specified in this parameter group.
Additional information on the transmission ratio è 3.3.4 Gear unit.
2.3.8.3 Axis
The working area contains parameter groups to display and specify axis-specific parameters, e. g. for
homing, axis configurations, stop delay times and limit values.
Interactive Graphic
Depending on the homing mode, axis zero point and software end positions, the reference system of
the axis is displayed in an interactive graphic based on the selected axis type.
The interactive graphic is displayed if the following prerequisite is met:
– An axis with a finite working stroke has been configured.
Identifier Description
Identifier Description
Measurement arrow for distance meas- Distance between two points, e. g. offset between refer-
urement ence point and axis zero point
Tab. 52 Description of the Interactive Graphic Elements
The interactive graphic is always displayed with the following units regardless of the unit settings:
– Millimetres for linear axes
– Revolutions for rotative axes
Positioning the Reference Point
If the reference point is selected, it is displayed in blue and can be moved.
When moving the reference point, the scale is moved at the same time.
The values of the software end positions and axis zero point remain the same. The displayed positions
of the software end positions and axis zero point are moved.
Positioning the Axis Zero Point
If the axis zero point is selected, it is displayed in blue and can be moved.
When moving the axis zero point, the scale is moved at the same time.
The values of the software end positions remain the same. The displayed positions of the software
end positions are moved.
The reference point value is modified. The displayed position of the reference point remains the same.
The axis zero point value also changes in the "Axis configuration" parameter group.
If the axis zero point value is specified via the "Axis configuration" parameter group, the value also
changes in the interactive graphic.
The values of the software end positions also change in the "Axis configuration" parameter group.
If the values of the software end positions are specified via the "Axis configuration" parameter group,
the values also change in the interactive graphic.
"Homing method"
The homing method is selected in this parameter group and it is specified whether the axis zero point
should be approached following referencing.
Additional information on homing è 4.4 Homing.
If a homing method is selected that is not consistent with other settings, such as the configuration of
the corresponding switch, the parameter is marked with a warning. The reason for the warning is dis-
played in the adorner, and a jump to the relevant parameter screen is also possible using a button.
"Homing parameters"
The values for the velocity, acceleration and jerk limitation for the homing are specified in this para-
meter group.
Additional information on homing è 4.4 Homing.
"Axis configuration"
The values for the axis zero point and software end positions are specified in this parameter group.
The values can also be determined via the interactive graphic.
Additional information on the system of measurement units
è 3.2.5 Dimension Reference System and axis zero point è 4.4 Homing.
Additional information on monitoring the software end positions
è 5.6 Software limit position reached.
"Stop deceleration"
The stop ramp is parameterised in this parameter group.
Additional information on stopping è 4.2 Stop.
"User defined limits"
General limit values for the control limiter are specified in this parameter group.
Additional information on limit values è 6.2.2 Control limitation.
Symbol Description
Parameter Comments
If three record links have already been created for a record, the button ("Add transition") is
deactivated.
If a type of record link that has not been described is specified, this is indicated by a symbol next
to the record number in the record list. The button ("Add transition") is deactivated.
This step is skipped if a record link condition does not have any parameters.
Records that have already been created and non-existent records can be specified as the consec-
utive record.
If a non-existent record is specified as the consecutive record, this is indicated by a symbol next to
the number of the consecutive record in the record list.
1 Overview of a record link 3 Tool tip that displays the record links that
2 Indication that this record is part of a record refer to this record
link
Fig. 19 Elements of a record link
If a record type that has not been described is specified, this is indicated by a symbol next to the
record number in the record list. The button ("Edit record set") is deactivated.
Parameter Comments
"Velocity control"
The velocity controller is parameterised in this parameter group.
Additional information on the velocity controller è 6.1.3 Velocity Controller.
"Position control"
The position controller is parameterised in this parameter group.
Additional information on the position controller è 6.1.2 Position Controller.
"Closed loop calculation"
In this group, the current status of the controller data is displayed and the controller calculation is car-
ried out again if necessary. The status provides information on the determination and validity of the
controller data.
Status Description
Default values The closed-loop settings originate from the device description file
in the plug-in.
Calculated values The controller data were determined optionally:
– by actuating the "Calculate" button
– by the drive configuration on the basis of the selected motor,
the Festo axis and the set controller dynamics
The inertia ratio of the Festo drive was taken into consideration
when calculating the closed-loop settings.
Online optimized values The displayed controller data was read from the last connected
device.
Open shaft The controller data displayed correspond to the controller data of
the configured motor with open shaft.
Unsupported values The controller data were determined optionally:
– by actuating the "Calculate" button
– by the drive configuration based on the selected motor, the
axis and the set controller dynamics
The database does not contain any valid data for the configured
motor-axis combination. The closed-loop controller data must be
adapted manually to avoid overloading the components.
Invalid values No useful data could be calculated for the velocity controller. The
data must be adapted manually.
Tab. 56 Status of Controller Data
The addition of "Changed manually" is attached to the relevant status as soon as at least one closed-
loop parameter has been changed manually.
Calculation
The dynamic of the closed-loop controller is set using the slider in the working area to calculate the
controller data. The "Hard" setting generally improves the positioning behaviour, but can also lead to
a rough control behaviour and a high-frequency humming motor.
Countermeasures:
– Move slider in the "Soft" direction.
– Increase the filter time constant of the velocity filter (parameter "Velocity control"group ).
The "Calculate" button starts the calculation of the controller data for the current drive configuration.
The button is only active if the following prerequisites are met:
– A drive configuration has been completed.
– The plug-in is not connected to a device.
After changing the following parameters, calculate the controller data again:
• Weight
• Moment of inertia
• Properties of the motor cable
Symbol Description
The parameters are only transferred to the active parameter, once the ("Apply closed-loop settings
record to active parameter") button has been actuated.
The results of the auto-tuning are effective in the following operating modes:
• In closed-loop operation
• In open-loop operation with encoder
Auto-tuning is a process during which the closed-loop parameters for position and velocity controllers
are automatically adjusted. The process can be completed statically (when the motor is at a standstill)
or dynamically (when the motor is running). The dynamic process is suitable for drive systems for
which the properties are not known. The calculation is based on the following data:
– Current regulator, which is already designed
– Suitable start parameters for position and velocity controllers
– Amplitude of excitation signal
Servo drive start values
The standard values for the position controller and velocity controller are determined in this paramet-
er group. The start parameters are determined automatically on the basis of the drive configuration.
Additional information on auto tuning è 6.5 Auto-tuning.
Results
The auto-tuning results are displayed in this parameter group once the values have been adopted by
the assistant.
Additional information on auto tuning è 6.5 Auto-tuning.
Measurement of movement (identification) and Test movement (validation)
The properties for the movement measurement and movement test are defined by a test run in these
parameter groups.
The following parameters are initially not synchronised with the corresponding acceleration and decel-
eration parameters.
– Measurement of movement (identification)
– Maximum acceleration during the identification
– Maximum deceleration during the identification
– Test movement (validation)
– Maximum acceleration during validation movement
– Maximum deceleration during validation movement
This ensures that different values can be specified for the acceleration and deceleration. A synchron-
isation is not carried out until the function is started in the assistant.
Additional information on auto-tuning è 6.5 Auto-tuning
Start auto tuning...
Via the button "Start auto tuning...", the assistant for configuration and execution of the auto-tuning
is displayed. The button is only active if the following prerequisites are met:
– The plug-in is connected to the device.
– The plug-in has the master control.
Additional information on the assistant for auto-tuning è Running Auto-Tuning
Symbol Description
"Constraints"
Start the auto-tuning after setting the rigidity and the dynamics of
the closed-loop controller (soft, medium or hard).
"Start"
Display the auto-tuning status
"Status"
Display the auto-tuning results
"Results"
Tab. 58 Description of the Toolbar Symbols for Auto-Tuning
Section/command Description
Function:
– Assign master control to the plug-in or higher-level controller
"Control" The scroll bar shows the current setting.
The master control can be withdrawn from the fieldbus using the
plug-in. If the master control is released again, it automatically
goes to the fieldbus.
If the connection is interrupted, the plug-in releases the master
control again.
Requirement:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– No other plug-in has the master control.
Section/command Description
If the maximum acceleration value is changed during the identification, the maximum deceleration
value changes by the same amount during the identification.
The start parameters for the closed-loop controller are influenced by the selection. A standard
value for the rigidity is recommended depending on the selected configuration. The relevant value
is highlighted with the "(recommended)" addition.
Once the marginal conditions are set, the motion measurement can be carried out. The button "Start
auto tuning" is only active if the following prerequisites are met:
– The plug-in is connected to the device.
– The plug-in has the master control.
– Controller enable is activated.
1. Press the "Start auto tuning..." button.
Ä The "Status" screen is displayed. The calculation of the auto-tuning is completed.
2. Press the "Next" button.
Ä The page "Results" opens and shows the current and newly calculated parameter values of
the velocity and position controller.
3. On page "Results", a motion test (validation) may be optionally completed:
– Adjust the motion parameters for validation.
– Using the button "Execute test run", start the validation.
4. If required: repeat identification.
The button "Retry" leads back to page "Constraints" for the assistant.
5. Once the auto-tuning is complete, use the button "Apply values" to transfer the results to the
plug-in.
The following new values are then displayed on the page "Closed loop" and the page "Auto tun-
ing":
– Result amplification gain of position controller
– Result amplification gain of velocity controller
– Result integration constant of velocity controller
In order to optimise the closed-loop settings for specific applications, the auto-tuning measurement
result can be evaluated as follows on the "Auto tuning" diagnostics screen:
• Display or export of logarithmic diagrams
• Export settings to a CSV file
Additional information on the function, parameterisation and motion test (test run)
è 6.5 Auto-tuning.
The input variables for the pilot control are directly connected to the output variable or are adjusted
using a mathematical operation.
Additional information on pilot control è 6.3 Pilot control (Setpoint value control).
The working area contains a graphic to set the parameters for the pilot control calculation.
1 "Edit friction"
Fig. 20 "Feed forward control"parameter panel
The changed values are not applied if the "Apply parameters" button is not actuated, and the
pop-up is closed.
Fig. 21 Timing diagram with input fields for the automatic mode
Cam switches
This parameter group is only visible if the "Mode cam controller" parameter is set to Automatic. In the
parameter group, you can define new ones Cam switches for automatic mode and edit existing Cam
switchesones.
When editing a cam switch, a pop-up appears that allows you to edit the selected cam switch in indi-
vidual steps. When editing the existing cam switches, the last step of the pop-up control is opened.
Symbols can be used to trigger the following commands:
"New cam "New cam switch" button Adds a new entry to the list.
switch"
Edit Allows you to edit the corresponding cam switch.
Delete Deletes the cam switch from the list after a prompt.
Tab. 62
Acceptance of the Initial Values as Active Values
The "Activate values" button can only be activated if the plug-in is connected to the device. When the
button is activated, the set initial values are taken over by the device as the active value and are then
visible in the "Active values" parameter group.
Tab. 63
Active values
If the plug-in is disconnected from the device, the default value of parameter Current cam controller
mode is displayed.
If there is a connection with the device, the parameters of the cam controller active in the device are
displayed in the Active values parameter group.
Cam controller mode Specifies the current mode of the cam controller function.
Configured port Shows the digital output connected to the cam controller.
Current cam controller Specifies the current source of the position values of the cam control-
source ler.
Switching time (manual) Specifies the current switch-on time for mode 4.
Tt1 Specifies the current delay compensation of the first switching point for
the switch-on process.
Tt2 Specifies the current delay compensation of the second switching point
for the switch-on process.
-Mod Specifies the currently determined lower limit value for the modulo cal-
culation.
+Mod Specifies the currently determined upper limit value for the modulo cal-
culation.
Hy Specifies the current hysteresis. In the hysteresis range, switching pro-
cedures are suppressed around the switching point during fluctuations.
Offset Specifies the currently used offset of the modulo position.
Tab. 64
The timing diagram is only visible if the "automatic" mode is active.
The timing diagram shows an example of the signal curve for the positive direction of motion with the
active parameters for the automatic mode.
Cam switches
This parameter group is only visible if the "automatic" mode is active. The parameter group shows the
parameters for the cam switches defined for the automatic mode.
By selecting the corresponding screen in the navigation tree, the respective screen can be selected
directly. You can use links in the working area of the "Touch probe" screen to select the "Touch probe
0" … n screen alternatively.
The screens provide the following functions:
– Selection of the desired Touch Probe mode
– Displays the input configured for the Touch Probe function
– Warning if no input is configured and possibility to jump to the Digital I/O screen via adorner/pop-
up
– Graphically supported input option for the parameters relevant to the selected operating mode
– When connected to the device: Activation possibility of the selected settings
– Display of active parameters and additional actual values as real-time values
Detailed information on the parameterisation of the Touch Probe function
è 7.2 Position detection (touch probe).
Prepared values
In the "Prepared values" parameter group, you can define the initial values of the respective position
acquisition.
In the "General parameters" subgroup, parameters can be set depending on the selected position
acquisition mode. Parameters that are not relevant for the selected mode are invisible.
Touch probe mode Determines the mode of the touch probe function. The specified mode
is effective on activation of the touch probe function. Available modes
è 7.2 Position detection (touch probe).
Selection trigger event Determines the type of signal edge with which the measurement shall
be triggered.
Configured input Internal parameters:
Displays the configured input for the touch probe function.
Touch probe source Determines the source of the measured values.
+MOD Determines the upper limit value for the modulo calculation. When the
upper limit value is exceeded, the position jumps to the lower limit
value.
–MOD Determines the lower limit value for the modulo calculation. When the
lower limit value is undershot, the position jumps to the upper limit
value.
Offset Offset of the modulo position
+MOD Determines the upper limit for trigger signals within the modulo range.
Trigger signals at positions above the limit are ignored. Only relevant in
the following modes: once with window and cyclic with window
–MOD Determines the lower limit for trigger signals within the modulo range.
Trigger signals at positions below the limit are ignored. Only relevant in
the following modes: once with window and cyclic with window
Tab. 65
Symbol Description
Trigger function
Modulo function
Trigger
Symbol Description
Tab. 67
Active values
If the plug-in is disconnected from the device, the default value of parameter Current touch probe
mode is displayed.
If there is a connection with the device, the parameters of the position detection active in the device
are displayed in the Active values parameter group.
Current touch probe mode Specifies the current mode of the touch probe function.
Current values
Current selection trigger Specifies the currently defined signal edge of the trigger event.
event
Configured input Displays the configured input for the touch probe function.
Current touch probe source Specifies the current sources of the measured values.
Absolute position in user Indicate the position in the user units in relation to the axis zero point.
units
+MOD Specifies the currently determined upper limit value for the modulo cal-
culation.
–MOD Specifies the currently determined lower limit value for the modulo cal-
culation.
Offset Specifies the currently used offset of the modulo position.
+MOD Specifies the upper limit for trigger signals within the modulo range.
Trigger signals at positions above the limit are ignored.
–MOD Specifies the lower limit for trigger signals within the modulo range.
Trigger signals at positions below the limit are ignored.
Modulo position Modulo of the reference position
Results
Time stamp touch probe Specifies the time of the last measurement based on the system time
position of the device.
Touch probe position Specifies the position of the last measurement.
Trigger event initiated Indicates whether the trigger signal was triggered within the specified
range. With cyclic acquisition, the signal is set up to the transition of
the modulo limit and is reset at the transition.
Trigger event NOT initiated Specifies whether a trigger signal has been triggered within the defined
range if the module limit is exceeded. 1 means that the trigger signal
has not been triggered
Trigger events counter Specifies the number of valid measurements. The parameter value
triggered increases at every valid measurement.
Trigger events counter NOT Specifies the number of invalid measurements. The parameter value
triggered increases at every invalid measurement.
Tab. 68
2.4 Control
2.4.1 Surface
Toolbar
In addition to the standard commands, the toolbar for the "Control" context also contains the follow-
ing command:
Identifier Function
Depending on the drive configuration, a zero point offset is determined during homing. After success-
ful completion of the homing run, the determined zero point offset must be saved.
Requirements:
• The drive configuration contains a motor with encoder.
• The homing of the drive is valid (homing status "Homed").
The button "Save zero point offset"permanently secures the zero point offset. This ensures that the
determined value is retained when the device is restarted.
"Manual movement"
The section "Manual movement" supports simple manual operation and does not require an active
control program. This function allows, for example, the testing and setting up of the mechanics of a
machine during commissioning.
The current actual position is displayed and can be adopted using the command buttons in the
adorner pop-up, e. g. for setting the software end position.
Jog Mode
1 Negative jogging Jog movement in negative direction
Motion parameters:
– "Jog mode" parameter screen
– è 2.3.8.14,
Symbol Description
2.5 Diagnosis
2.5.1 Surface
Toolbar
In addition to the standard commands, the toolbar contains the following commands for the "Diagnos-
is" context:
Identifier Function
1 Status "Servo drive" Servo drive symbol including colour display of the status as
provided in the message directory.
If available, display of the currently applicable number of
the diagnostic message with the highest priority for the
servo drive.
2 Status "Axis" Axis symbol including colour display of the status as
provided in the message directory.
If available, display of the currently applicable number of
the diagnostic message with the highest priority for the
axis.
3 "Acknowledge all" Acknowledge all of the current diagnostic messages
è 9.4.5 Acknowledging messages and errors.
Status Representation
Unavailable signal
Status Representation
When exporting diagnostic data, all parameters are exported, even if they are not visible to the user.
The "Error classification" diagnostic panel contains a table with all of the diagnostic messages from
the device for which the classification has been changed.
The table is split into the following columns:
Ignore
Information
Warning
Stop category 2
Stop category 1
Stop category 1
Status Description
There are various settings. Some messages that have been classified as
warnings are written to the diagnostic memory, others are not.
All messages that have been classified as warnings are written to the dia-
gnostic memory.
Status Description
All messages that have been classified as warnings are not written to the
diagnostic memory.
Tab. 78 Description of the Statuses of the Checkbox "Store warnings to error log"
Switching to the "Error log" Panel
Actuating the "Go to diagnosis page "Error log"" button via the table opens the "Error log" dia-
gnostics panel.
A direct search for a device parameter can be completed via the search field using the ID,
name or description.
The "Frequently used" category contains the most common device parameters.
Symbol Description
Parameter Comments
Parameter Comments
Trace delay Defines the pre- or post-trigger time with which a recording starts
when the trigger condition occurs (positive values: pre-trigger
time, negative values: post-trigger time).
Tab. 81 Information on Internal Parameters
If the trigger time should be set by pressing the button "Start trace", a trigger does not need to be
added. No trigger settings are needed (trigger type 0).
If data in the parameter directory for the device (trigger type 1) or a diagnostic result (trigger type 2)
should be used as a trigger, the trigger is selected as follows:
1. If a trigger has not yet been configured, actuate the button "Add new trigger" . If a trigger was
already configured, actuate the symbol ("Edit trigger") .
Ä The pop-up to edit a trigger is opened. If a trigger was already configured, the pop-up displays
the last edit step directly. Buttons in the pop-up enable scrolling to the previous or next step.
2. In the first edit step of the pop-up, select the trigger type (trigger type 1 or 2).
Ä The following steps depend on the selected trigger type.
If the data trigger (1) trigger type is selected, the following steps are required:
1. Select device parameter category.
The "Frequently used" category contains the most common device parameters.
A direct search for a device parameter can be completed via the search field using the ID, name or
description.
Device parameters are combined in groups. The group can be hidden or shown by clicking on the
group title.
3. Depending on the data type of the selected device parameter, it is possible to select the trigger
condition bit mask or threshold value. If the selected data type only permits the selection of a
"threshold" value, this is set automatically. Next step in the next step.
4. Select the second trigger condition (e. g. "Falling edge") e. g. if the value falls below the
threshold value.
5. If the trigger condition "Threshold value" has been selected, set the threshold value.
If the trigger condition Bit Mask was selected, set Bit Mask. The pop-up supports multiple selec-
tion with the mouse in connection with the [CTRL] pushbutton or the [Shift] pushbutton.
6. Press the "Change trigger" button.
Ä The selected data trigger is then displayed in the parameter group and can be changed or
deleted again if required.
If the diagnostic trigger (2) trigger type was selected, the following steps are required:
1. Select trigger condition.
2. Select diagnostic element.
A direct search for a diagnostic element can be completed via the search field using the ID, name
or description.
The buttons to start and stop a recording are located underneath the status.
Starting the Trace
Recordings can be started with the button "Start trace" or the symbol ("Start trace") of the tool-
bar.
The button and the symbol "Start trace" are active if the following prerequisites are met:
– A valid trace configuration is set.
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– No recording is currently being performed.
Stopping the Trace
The recording is stopped with the button "Stop trace".
The "Stop trace" button is only active if the following prerequisites are met:
– The plug-in is connected to a device.
– A recording is currently being performed.
The "Stop trace" button stops the recording even if the recording is not fully completed.
1 Recording (selected) Name, date and time of the recording shown in the graph
section;
The text of the selected recording is highlighted in bold.
2 Elements of the preceding Elements of the recording are the recorded channels and the
recording trigger for the recording.
The list contains the element name and the assigned line
type. Using a symbol, the visibility of the element in the
graph can be switched on or off if the element is scaled on
the Y primary axis.
Elements that are scaled on the X axis do not have a symbol,
as the visibility of these elements cannot be switched over.
The graph curve of selected elements is highlighted in the
graph. This changes the line thickness and the data points
are marked.
The channels are sorted by channel number in ascending
order from top to bottom. The channel number is displayed
in the tooltip of the element.
3 Recording (deselected) Name, date and time of recordings that are not currently
shown in the graph section are not highlighted in bold.
Clicking on the entry switches over the display and shows the
recording in the graph section.
4 "Import..." button Recordings previously exported can be imported into the list
of recordings.
5 Buttons in the title bar è Tab.84 Description of the Symbols in the Title Bar of the
Working Area
6 Graph section In this section, the selected recording is shown as a graph.
The signal curves are shown in the same colour as the label
for the associated Y axis.
7 Y primary axis The scaling of the Y primary axis influences the pattern of the
grid. In addition, the scaling of the Y primary axis is also used
for measuring bars.
8 List of recordings and their The list contains the available recordings and their elements.
elements Elements are recorded signals and the trigger for the respect-
ive recording.
Tab. 82 Legend
The symbols in the recording list have the following meanings:
Element visible Indicates that the element is visible if the associated recording is
shown in the graph section.
Clicking on it switches the element to non-visible. If an element is
hidden that is scaled on the Y primary axis, the following visible
element is scaled on the Y primary axis, and it not scaled on the X
axis.
With elements that are scaled on the X axis, the visibility cannot
be changed.
Element non-visible Indicates that the element is non-visible if the associated record-
ing is shown in the graph section.
Clicking on it switches the element to visible.
Opened The elements of the assigned recording are visible. Clicking the
symbol closes the elements of the recording in the recording list.
This hides all elements of the recording in the list.
Alternatively, the elements can also be collapsed by double-click-
ing the recording.
Closed The elements of the assigned recording are hidden. Clicking the
symbol opens the elements of the recording in the recording list.
This shows all elements of the recording in the list.
Alternatively, the elements can also be opened by double-clicking
the recording.
Scaled on the Y The marked element is scaled on the Y primary axis.
primary axis
Scaled on the X axis The marked element is scaled on the X axis.
Combined Y-axis The Y-axis of the selected element is combined with the Y-axis of
another element with the same selection (scaling several elements
on one Y-axis).
"Import..." button enables the import of recordings that were previously exported as
a csv file
Tab. 83 Description of the Symbols in the Working Area
Via the symbols in the title bar of the working area, the following commands can be triggered:
Reset zoom Expands the graph to the maximum extension of the X-axis.
Tab. 84 Description of the Symbols in the Title Bar of the Working Area
Rename Enables the renaming of the recording (also possible with the
function key [F2]).
Delete Removes the diagram of the selected recording from the trace dis-
play.
Delete all Removes all diagrams from the trace display.
Delete all but this Removes all diagrams from the trace display except the selected
diagram.
Expand all Expands the elements of all recordings in the recording list.
Collapse all Collapses the elements of all recordings of the recording list.
Collapse all but this Collapses the elements of all other recordings. The elements of
the selected recordings are expanded.
Tab. 86 Context Menu Commands for Recording Names
Combine axes Combines the Y-axes of selected elements with the same unit. The
elements are then scaled on the same combined Y-axis.
Split axes Separates the combined Y-axes of the elements again. Each ele-
ment is scaled on its own Y-axis.
Move graph – Click on the graph with the [left The cursor changes to a hand. The
mouse button]. graph moves with the mouse
– Keep the [mouse button] motion.
pressed and move the mouse.
Zooming with the zoom – Keep the [shift key] + [left The zoom box will stretch from the
box mouse button] pressed and start point to the current mouse
drag the mouse. position. Releasing the [mouse but-
– Release the [mouse button] at ton] will cause the size of the zoom
the desired end point. box to become zoomed.
Zooming with the – Point to the graph section with Zooming will occur as soon as the
mouse wheel the mouse. mouse wheel is moved.
– Zoom in or out with the mouse
wheel
Rescaling the axis – Move the mouse over the axis to The scaling follows the movement of
be rescaled. the mouse while the [left mouse but-
ton] is pressed.
Measuring bar with Keep the [CTRL] + [shift] + [left The measuring bar will stretch to the
dimensional reference mouse button] pressed and drag the the entire graph height.
to the X axis mouse
Measuring bar with Keep the [CTRL] + [left mouse but- The measuring bar will stretch from
dimensional reference ton] pressed and drag the mouse the start point to the current mouse
to the X axis and to the position.
Y primary axis
Tab. 89 Expanding the Measuring Bar
1 Measuring bar with dimensional reference to 3 Measuring bar with dimensional reference to
the X axis the X axis and to the Y primary axis
2 Symbol Delete
Fig. 26 Measuring bar
Depending on the measuring bar added, the distance between the measuring bar edges is displayed
with reference to the X axis or with reference to the X axis and Y axis. Clicking on the symbols shown in
the measuring bar "Delete" will remove the measuring bar from the graph once again. If the scaling of
the Y primary axis or the X axis is changed, all measuring bars are removed from the graph again. This
action cannot be undone.
Graph Tool Tip
The tool tip for the graph can be activated and deactivated using the symbol for the title bar of the
working area. The tool tip works in the following two modes:
Mode Description
Line If the time is plotted on the X axis, a line is shown in the graph.
The position of the line is attached to the mouse cursor. At the intersection
points of the line with the graph curves, information boxes are displayed with
the name and the current Y value of the signals. The time is displayed in an
information box on the X axis.
Cross-hair pointer If there is no time plotted on the X axis, a cross-hair pointer is shown in the
graph. The position of the crosshairs is attached to the mouse pointer.
If the cursor is over one or more data points, an information box with the corres-
ponding Y-value and signal name is displayed at this position for each data
point.
Tab. 90 Modes of the Tool Tip Command
Exporting the Recording
Recordings can be exported as a CSV file or as an image file or they can be copied directly as an image
or as csv data to the clipboard. CSV data and files can be further processed with external programmes
(Comma-separated values).
Exporting a Recording as a CSV File
• Select the command "Export as CSV"in the context menu of the recording name or in the title bar
of the working area.
Ä A dialogue opens which enables the file to be saved.
Copying CSV Data of the Recording to the Clipboard
• Select the command "Copy to clipboard"in the context menu of the recording name.
Ä The recording is then copied as CSV data to the clipboard.
Exporting the Recording as an Image
1. Select the recording name so that the recording is shown in the graph section.
2. In the context menu of the graph section or in the title bar of the working area, select the com-
mand "Export chart as image".
Ä A dialogue opens which enables the file to be saved.
Copying the Recording as an Image to the Clipboard
1. Select the recording so that this is shown in the graph section.
2. In the context menu of the graph section, select the command "Copy chart to clipboad".
Ä The image is then copied to the clipboard.
Importing a Recording
Recordings previously exported to CSV files can be imported as follows:
1 Logarithmic view of the frequency response 2 Logarithmic view of the phase response
Fig. 27 Auto-tuning measurement result
Activate tool tip Activates or deactivates the tool tip in the graphs. If the
tool tip is activated, the associated values are displayed
in a window by positioning a vertical reference line on
the values curve of the graphs.
Activate grid Activates or deactivates the grid in the graphs.
the event of a master/slave connection, one of the two devices is a master device and the other a
slave device.
Device Functions
Functions that are available to the applicable device in the CODESYS extension of the Festo Automa-
tion Suite are described in more detail in the documentation of the relevant device library.
The device library and the related documentation are automatically integrated into the CODESYS pro-
gram.
The following example describes the integration of a CMMT servo drive into a CODESYS program.
Connecting Device to a Controller as a Slave
• Connect device to a Festo controller as a slave (è Online help for Festo Automation Suite,
chapter "Projecting device networks").
Ä – The slave device is displayed in the "Programming" context of the controller (master
device)
– The slave device is automatically integrated in the control program when a connection to
the controller is established (master device)
– The slave device can be activated under the name specified in the Festo Automation Suite
in the CODESYS extension of the Festo Automation Suite.
Setting the Operating Mode on the "Fieldbus" Parameter Panel
If the device is connected to a controller, the operating mode in which the servo drive should be activ-
ated in the control program and the version of the device driver in the CODESYS CODESYS extension of
the Festo Automation Suite can be specified on the "Fieldbus" parameter panel è 2.3.5.
The following operating modes are available:
Mode Description
"Point to point" The servo drive receives a positioning command from the control-
ler.
To execute the movement, the servo drive uses the integrated tra-
jectory generator to calculate the required position setpoint val-
ues.
This operating mode is suitable for controlling an axis regardless
of the other axes (uncoordinated movement).
"SoftMotion" The controller sends the position setpoints to the servo drive via
the fieldbus.
This operating mode enables the coordinated movement of sever-
al axes. It requires a controller with CODESYS SoftMotion function.
Tab. 92 Operating Modes for the Servo Drive
Device drivers for the CODESYS extension of the Festo Automation Suite can be components of device-
specific plug-ins for the Festo Automation Suite. By installing a new plug-in version, new versions of
the device drivers are also installed. The latest available device driver version is used when establish-
ing a device connection in the Designer of the Festo Automation Suite. If a different driver version is
required, this version can be selected in the plug-in of the respective device.
Functions in the CODESYS Extension of the Festo Automation Suite with Selection of the Operating
Mode "SoftMotion"
The "SoftMotion" operating mode is based on the CODESYS SoftMotion and requires a controller with
SoftMotion function. Integration into the control program takes place as in CODESYS by transfer of the
SoftMotion axis object to PLCopen modules for SoftMotion.
Functions in the CODESYS Extension of the Festo Automation Suite with Selection of the Operating
Mode "Point to point"
When selecting "Point to point" operating mode, there are two options for integrating the device into
the control program:
– Transferring an axis object to PLCopen modules (similar to "Interpolated" operating mode/Soft-
Motion).
– Directly accessing methods and properties of axis objects.
Parameters for movement commands (e.g. target position or velocity) are always specified in user
units. If necessary, the device driver automatically adjusts itself internally to the parameterisation
saved on the device (e.g. scaling of setpoint values).
The mapping of the process data is also completed automatically and does not need to be implemen-
ted manually in the control program.
PLCopen modules are included in the Festo_PtP_BasePLCopen library. This library has the following
categories:
– Administrative FBs: Modules without a movement function, e. g. for issuing controller enable,
resetting device errors or importing actual values
– Continuous Motion FBs: Modules to execute continuous movement types (velocity- or torque-con-
trolled operation)
– Discrete Motion FBs: Modules to execute positioning jobs (absolute, additive and relative)
– Other FBs: Modules for other or manufacturer-specific functions, e. g. homing or record operation
Methods and properties of the axis object can primarily be accessed via the structured text. It must be
ensured that a method is only called up once and not cyclically. The device driver then executes the
relevant function itself and the status can be evaluated by requesting the corresponding properties.
For additional information on the available methods, see è Library documentation.
No. Description
1 Access to actual values via properties of axis object
2 Call up axis object method including direct switchover to the next step
3 Wait for successful execution of the method by requesting the corresponding property
No. Description
4 Start a positioning command including transfer of position and dynamic values in user
units
5 Wait to start and subsequently terminate the positioning process
Tab. 93 Legend for control program
3 Product Configuration
3.1 Controller
3.1.1 Communication interfaces
IP address
The device can be set to a concrete IP address or, alternatively, obtain the address via DHCP è Online
help for Festo Automation Suite.
Factory setting: 192.168.0.1
The Ethernet interface [X18] supports 2 connections of which only one may assume the master control.
With the "Identify Device" function, a flashing sequence can be activated on the connected servo
drive è 2.2.2.2 Establishing and Disconnecting a Connection.
MAC addresses
The device has 4 MAC addresses in total. The first MAC address can be found on the type plate, while
the other three have consecutive numbers based on the first address. MAC addresses 1, 2 and 3 are
allocated to the device profile. MAC address 4 is allocated to the communication interface [X18].
3.1.2 Firmware
Firmware Management
The servo drive supports the use of any number of compatible firmware packages. In this way, the
device can be updated to the latest firmware package. As required, however, an older firmware pack-
age can also be loaded, e.g. so that the same firmware version can be used in identical systems.
The firmware can be updated using Festo Automation Suite.
Compatibility Check
Before a firmware package is downloaded, the system checks whether the firmware is compatible with
the following:
– Basically for the type of equipment: CMMT-ST-...-EC (EtherCAT), CMMT-ST-...-PN (PROFINET) etc.
– The hardware version of the device
The check is performed by Festo Automation Suite before the download already.
Firmware Download
The available firmware packages are downloaded onto the PC using Festo Automation Suite.
The firmware file download and firmware update on the device are performed in the Scan area è Help
for Festo Automation Suite.
The firmware download may take several minutes and must not be interrupted. Do not turn off the
device! Do not close the software! Incorrectly or improperly executed firmware downloads can render
the device unusable (service case).
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
9550 0x2129.08 Firmware package version STRING(30)
9560 0x2129.09 Major version firmware package UINT32
9570 0x2129.0A Minor version firmware package UINT32
9580 0x2129.0B Patch version firmware package UINT32
9590 0x2129.0C Build version firmware package UINT32
Tab. 96 Objects
3.1.2.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs for Firmware
Changed parameters must be saved on the device; otherwise the last parameter set will become act-
ive again after a restart.
Sequence at the start-up of the servo drive and establishment of an online connection
Through the revocation of the master control by the plug-in, active setpoint settings are interrupted,
such as those made in the device profile.
The plug-in can assume and relinquish the master control at any time, even during an active motion
for example. If the plug-in assumes or relinquishes the master control, the device performs a Category
1 stop. Depending on the parameterisation, the master control then returns to the device profile inter-
face (factor setting) or I/O interface.
Recommendation: When relinquishing the master control, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the drive is at a standstill in a regulated manner (e.g. by a stop command, stop cat-
egory 2).
2. Revoke the controller enable (stop category 1, drive is at a standstill in an unregulated manner).
3. Relinquish the master control.
No master control is required for parameterisation. Parameterisation through the standard Ethernet
and device profile interfaces is always possible.
Simultaneous connections via standard Ethernet interface
Through the standard Ethernet interface, 2 connections at once are technically possible, e.g. through
2 device-specific plug-ins. If the master control has been assumed by a device-specific plug-in, the
plug-in has the master control until it relinquishes the master control again.
If the plug-in relinquishes the master control, the device performs a Category 1 stop.
Time-out
If the device-specific plug-in has the master control, the device detects when the connection to the
plug-in has been interrupted. The device executes the parameterised reaction. The time-out time is
typically 5 s. For slow networks, a longer time-out time can be selected.
Save zero point offset 0x2002.01 Controlling method Value = 1: execute method
0x2002.02 Method status Status
0x2002.03 Method return value Return code
Tab. 103 Saving zero point offset
PROFIdrive
Save zero point offset 1007 Controlling method Value = 1: execute method
1008 Method status Status
1009 Method return value Return code
Tab. 104 Saving zero point offset
PROFIdrive
PROFIdrive
8416 Axis zero point offset Specifies the offset of the axis zero point to the reference 3
1 2 mark.
Access read/write 4
Cell Content/description
1 Parameter number
2 Name of the parameter
3 Brief description of the parameter. If required: additional information on the para-
meter, e.g. content of indices, value list, etc.
4 Access: The parameter can be read or written
5 Update: change of the parameter:
– Immediately effective: assumed immediately in the parameter
– Reinitialisation: not effective until after reinitialisation
– Restart: does not come into effect until after a restart of the device
6 Unit:
– –: no unit
– User-defined: position, velocity, acceleration or jerk according to paramet-
erisation (see Px.1150.0.0, Current user unit)
– explicit specification of the applicable unit (Nm, kg, s, …)
Tab. 120 Legend for the parameter example
Cell Content/description
1 Range for CiA 402 objects: only the parameters that are allocated to an object of the
standard device profile for drives and motion controllers.
2 Range for manufacturer-specific objects: all parameters are allocated to an object in the
manufacturer-specific range
3 Parameter number
4 Allocated index and sub-index (hexadecimal)
5 Name of the parameter
6 Data type of the object; can differ from the data type of the parameter
Recomm. maximum
Tab. 123 Legend for the Object Table Example
Structure of the PNU Parameter Tables
The PNU parameter tables are structured as follows in the descriptions of the individual functions:
Cell Content/description
1 Range for profile-specific PNUs: only the parameters that are allocated to PNUs of the
PROFIdrive device profile.
2 Range for manufacturer-specific PNUs: parameters are allocated to the PNUs from the
manufacturer-specific range.
3 Parameter number
Cell Content/description
4 Assigned PNU (decimal)
5 Name of the parameter
6 Data type of the PNU; can differ from the data type of the parameter
Tab. 125 Legend for the PNU Table Example
Metre m 10 SINT64
Imperial in 8 SINT64
Revolution r 9 SINT64
Radian rad 8 SINT64
Degree ° 6 SINT64
Tab. 127 Configurable measuring units of the position
All measuring units for the position are depicted and preset with data type SINT64. The position is
depicted in every measuring unit with a different number of decimal places.
Examples for the depiction of positions
– 0.001 m x 1010 ≙ 1 x 107
– 1 degree x 106 ≙ 1 x 106
To simplify the entry for the user, the plug-in performs the necessary conversion in the commissioning
software of Festo. During the use of the plug-in, the units shown there and/or resolution for the entry
of the respective parameters must be used.
Using the drive profile, the resolutions set there always apply.
All position differences and derivations from the position are displayed as FLOAT32 values in the
device. As a result, a resolution (decimal place) does not have to be taken into consideration.
In user parameter sets, parameters are always saved in the unit set by the user. When a user unit is
set, the derived variable obtains the same length reference (m, m/s, m/s2, etc.).
CiA 402
Objects for the configurable measuring units
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1150 0x217C.01 Current user unit UINT32
1151 0x217C.02 Selection of next user unit UINT32
1152 0x217C.03 User unit status UINT32
Tab. 130 Objects
PROFIdrive
PNUs for the configurable measuring units
7841 Resolution position Determines the resolution of the position. The value is inter-
preted as ten-expont e.g. with meter and -6 the resolution is 1
µm.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7842 Resolution velocity Determines the resolution of the velocity. The value is inter-
preted as ten-expont e.g. with meter and -3 the resolution is 1
mm/s.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7843 Resolution accelera- Determines the resolution of the acceleration. The value is inter-
tion preted as ten-expont e.g. with meter and -3 the resolution is 1
mm/s².
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
CiA 402
Objects for the scaling of internal units for fieldbus
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
7841 0x2194.01 Resolution position SINT8
7842 0x2194.02 Resolution velocity SINT8
Resolution position
P1.7841.0.0 -5 Resolution 10-5
Resolution velocity
P1.7842.0.0 0 Resolution 10-0
Resolution acceleration
1.7843.0.0 0 Resolution 10-0
Resolution jerk
1.7843.0.0 0 Resolution 10-0
Tab. 135 Parameters for setting factor group (example)
In CODESYS the increments must be set to 100000 so the module writes the position in the correct
resolution.
Example
CMMT is parameterised to metres. This setting shall also be used through the device profile.
The following shall be parameterised:
– Position increment 0.000001 m = 1 µm
– 1 velocity 0.001 m/s = 1 mm/s
– 1 acceleration 0.001 m/s2 = 1 mm/s2
– 1 jerk 0.001 m/s3 = 1 mm/s3
Resolution position
P1.7841.0.0 -6 Resolution 10-6
Resolution velocity
P1.7842.0.0 -3 Resolution 10-3
Resolution acceleration
1.7843.0.0 -3 Resolution 10-3
Resolution jerk
1.7843.0.0 -3 Resolution 10-3
Tab. 136 Setting factor group parameters (example)
In CODESYS the “Increments” field must be set to 1000000 so the module writes the position in the
correct resolution.
PROFIdrive
PNUs for the scaling of internal units for fieldbus
3.2.5.1 Function
The correct positioning of the drive requires a defined dimension reference system. To define the
measuring reference system, the following steps must be taken during first-time commissioning.
– Defining the Axis Zero Point
– Limitation of the usable range by software end positions and/or limit switches
– Determine the reference point using a homing run and move the factory-set zero point of the
absolute encoder
The various positions are specified according to the configured user unit. At the conversion of the user
unit, the variables are converted automatically.
The various positions are specified according to the configured user unit. At the conversion of the user
unit, the variables are converted automatically è 3.2.4 Measuring units.
1170 Reversing the direc- Determines whether the reversal of the direction of rotation
tion of rotation shall be activated.
This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: active
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1172 Phase rotation Specifies whether the sequence of phases is swapped. The usu-
al phase sequence for the servomotor to turn clockwise is
ascending (U, V, W). If the servomotor has the phase sequence
U, W, V, the phase sequence is reversed. 0 for the phase
sequence U, V, W and 1 for the phase sequence U, W, V. For a
stepper motor, the phase sequence for 0 is the assignment A-#A
and B-#B. For the phase sequence equal to 1, the assignment A-
#A and #B-B is. Changing the phase sequence changes the
rotating field of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 142 Parameter
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
3.2.5.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs for the measuring reference system
3.3.1.1 Function
The device supports Festo motors and the use of the motors of other manufacturers (third-party
motors). Information on the motor used must be provided to the device during the configuration of the
drive system. The following options are available for configuration:
Readout of motor data from the In the case of certain Festo motors, the motor data is stored in the
motor encoder EEPROM of the integrated encoder. If a corresponding motor is
used by Festo, the motor data can be read out using the plug-in
and assumed in the current project.
Configuring motor data All required information to the motor can be configured with the
plug-in or transferred to the device through the device profile
used. In the case of third-party motors, the requirement informa-
tion must be taken from the data sheet of the motor. In the case of
Festo motors, the information is saved in the database of the cur-
rent plug-in and assumed automatically in the project during the
configuration procedure of the plug-in.
Tab. 145 Motor configuration options
For the configuration of the motor, parameters with the following motor data are present in the device:
– Active motor data (currently effective motor data, è 3.3.1.8 Active motor data parameters
– Motor data from the EEPROM of the encoder (if present,
è 3.3.1.5 Parameter and diagnostic messages for motor data from the EEPROM memory)
– Motor data from the user configuration (assume from the database or transfer manually,
è 3.3.1.2 Parameter and diagnostic messages for motor data from the user configuration)
Using parameter Px.14.0.0, it is possible to determine which motor data shall be assumed as active
data. The motor data is fundamentally not assumed until after reinitialisation.
The motor data is fundamentally not assumed until after reinitialisation. Incorrect motor data can
damage the motor!
3.3.1.2 Parameter and diagnostic messages for motor data from the user configuration
The following list contains the changeable motor data. During the configuration of Festo motors using
the plug-in, the motor data is assumed automatically from the database after the selection of the
motor. During the configuration of third-party motors, the data must be entered manually.
718 Pole pairs (user Specifies the number of pole pairs of the motor -> data sheet of
defined) the motor. 1 pole pair = 2 poles!
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7111 Motor inertia (user Specifies the inertia of the motor used -> data sheet of the
defined) motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit kgm²
7114 Phase sequence (user Specifies whether the sequence of phases is swapped. The usu-
defined) al phase sequence for the servomotor to turn clockwise is
ascending (U, V, W). If the servomotor has the phase sequence
U, W, V, the phase sequence is reversed. 0 for the phase
sequence U, V, W and 1 for the phase sequence U, W, V. For a
stepper motor, the phase sequence for 0 is the assignment A-#A
and B-#B. For the phase sequence equal to 1, the assignment A-
#A and #B-B is. Changing the phase sequence changes the
rotating field of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7117 Nominal current (user Specifies the root mean square value of the nominal current of
defined) the motor when loading with the nominal torque -> data sheet of
the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Arms
7120 Maximum peak cur- Specifies the permissible root mean square value of the maxim-
rent (user defined) um current that may flow through the motor in the short term ->
data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Arms
7123 Maximum rpm (user Specifies the maximum permissible velocity of the motor used ->
defined) data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit rpm
7126 Nominal rotary speed Specifies the nominal rotary speed of the motor -> data sheet of
(user defined) the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit rpm
7129 Winding inductance Specifies the inductance between 2 motor phases for a servo-
(user defined) motor. Indicates the inductance of a motor phase in a stepper
motor. -> data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit H
7132 Winding resistance Specifies the winding resistance between 2 motor phases for a
(user defined) servomotor. Specifies the winding resistance of a motor phase
for a stepper motor. -> data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Ω
7135 Torque constant (user Specifies the ratio of the motor torque to the root mean square
defined) value of the current -> data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Nm/Arms
7144 Time constant I²t Specifies the duration for which the parameterised maximum
(user defined) current may act. In the case of a servomotor, the current set-
point is automatically limited to the rated current at the end of
the period and the corresponding diagnostic message with the
parameterised behaviour is generated (I²t monitoring). If a
thermal model is used for I²t monitoring, as for a stepper motor
with rated current=maximum current, the time constant is used
as the filter time constant.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit s
7147 Winding temperature Specifies the maximum permissible winding temperature of the
(user defined) motor -> data sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit °C
7153 Temperature sensor Specifies the sensor type of the temperature sensor -> data
(user defined) sheet of the motor.
Possible sensor types
è Tab. 147 Value list of the temperature sensor parameters.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7156 Temperature sensor Specifies the characteristic of the temperature sensor -> data
characteristic (user sheet of the motor. The temperature characteristic is described
defined) by a straight line whose increase is determined by the gain and
whose position is determined by the offset.
– Index 0: gain
– Index 1: Offset
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7159 Holding brake (user Determines whether the motor has an integrated holding brake
defined) and whether it shall be used -> data sheet of the motor.
– 0: inactive, holding brake not available
– 1: active, holding brake available
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7162 Switch-on delay hold- user-configured switch-on delay
ing brake (user Determines how long the next command is delayed after a con-
defined) troller enable. Using this parameter, the behaviour of the device
is adapted to the inertia of the holding brake by parameters. No
orders are processed until the switch-on delay has elapsed, so
the holding brake can release completely.
Access read/write
71430 Lq inductance (user The inductance is orthogonal to the direction of the field. This
defined) value is a theoretical construct and cannot be measured -> data
sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit H
71431 Ld inductance (user The inductance is in parallel with the direction of the field. This
defined) value is a theoretical construct and cannot be measured -> data
sheet of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit H
71432 Motor type Selection of motor type -> data sheet of the motor.
– 1: stepper motor
– 2: servo motor (EC motor)
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 146 Parameter
06 | 00 | 00248 Motor type is not supported The parameterised motor type (servo, stepper
(100663544) etc.) is not supported
Tab. 148 Diagnostic messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
718 0x216C.01 Pole pairs (user defined) UINT32
7111 0x216C.02 Motor inertia (user defined) FLOAT32
7114 0x216C.03 Phase sequence (user defined) BOOL
7117 0x216C.04 Nominal current (user defined) FLOAT32
7120 0x216C.05 Maximum peak current (user defined) FLOAT32
7123 0x216C.06 Maximum rpm (user defined) FLOAT32
7126 0x216C.07 Nominal rotary speed (user defined) FLOAT32
7129 0x216C.08 Winding inductance (user defined) FLOAT32
7132 0x216C.09 Winding resistance (user defined) FLOAT32
7135 0x216C.0A Torque constant (user defined) FLOAT32
7144 0x216C.0B Time constant I²t (user defined) FLOAT32
7147 0x216C.0C Winding temperature (user defined) FLOAT32
7153 0x216C.0D Temperature sensor (user defined) UINT32
7156 0x225B.01 ... 02 Temperature sensor characteristic (user FLOAT32
defined)
7159 0x216C.0E Holding brake (user defined) BOOL
7162 0x216C.0F Switch-on delay holding brake (user defined) FLOAT32
7165 0x216C.10 Switch-off delay holding brake (user defined) FLOAT32
7182 0x216C.11 NOC code motor (user defined) STRING(32)
7184 0x216C.12 Database ID motor (user defined) UINT32
71421 0x216C.13 Nominal motor voltage (user defined) FLOAT32
71424 0x216C.14 Continuous current (user defined) FLOAT32
71430 0x216C.15 Lq inductance (user defined) FLOAT32
71431 0x216C.16 Ld inductance (user defined) FLOAT32
71432 0x216C.17 Motor type UINT8
Tab. 149 Objects
3.3.1.4 PROFIdrive
Motor data PNUs from the user configuration
3.3.1.5 Parameter and diagnostic messages for motor data from the EEPROM memory
If the motor data is stored in the EEPROM of the integrated encoder, the motor data can be read out.
The read-out motor data is transferred to the parameters listed here.
The device has an encoder interface. The parameters of the encoder interface are allocated to instance
0.
7113 Phase sequence #A and #B-B is. Changing the phase sequence changes the
rotating field of the motor.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7116 Nominal current Specifies the root mean square value of the nominal current
when loading the motor with the nominal torque.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit Arms
7119 Maximum current Specifies the root mean square value of the permissible maxim-
um current that may flow through the motor in the short term.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit Arms
7122 Maximum rpm Specifies the maximum permissible velocity of the motor.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit rpm
7125 Nominal rotary speed Specifies the nominal rotary speed of the motor.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit rpm
7128 Winding inductance Indicates the inductance between 2 motor phases for a servo-
motor. Indicates the inductance of a motor phase in a stepper
motor.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit H
7131 Winding resistance Specifies the winding resistance between 2 motor phases for a
servomotor. Specifies the winding resistance of a motor phase
for a stepper motor.
Access read/−
7151 Minor version hard- Specifies the minor version number of the hardware.
ware Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7152 Temperature sensor Sensor type of temperature sensor.
Possible sensor types
è Tab. 147 Value list of the temperature sensor parameters.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7155 Temperature sensor Specifies the characteristic of the temperature sensor. The tem-
characteristic perature characteristic is described by a straight line resulting
from the gain (increase) and the offset.
Index 0: gain
Index 1: Offset
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7158 Holding brake Specifies whether the motor has an integrated holding brake.
– 0: inactive, holding brake not available
– 1: active, holding brake available
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
7161 Switch-on delay hold- Switch-on delay saved in the EEPROM for the execution of a
ing brake command if an electronic data sheet for the Festo motor is
stored.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit s
7164 Switch-off delay hold- The delay saved in the EEPROM for the deactivation of the regu-
ing brake lator if an electronic data sheet for the Festo motor is stored.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
7430 Motor type Selection of motor type -> data sheet of the motor.
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 151 Parameter
06 | 00 | 00248 Motor type is not supported The parameterised motor type (servo, stepper
(100663544) etc.) is not supported
Tab. 152 Diagnostic messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
710 0x2106.01 Product key STRING(15)
711 0x2106.03 NOC code STRING(32)
712 0x2106.05 Material number UINT32
713 0x2106.07 Serial number STRING(20)
717 0x2106.09 Pole pairs UINT32
7110 0x2106.0B Motor inertia FLOAT32
7113 0x2106.0D Phase sequence BOOL
7116 0x2106.0F Nominal current FLOAT32
7119 0x2106.11 Maximum current FLOAT32
7122 0x2106.13 Maximum rpm FLOAT32
7125 0x2106.15 Nominal rotary speed FLOAT32
7128 0x2106.17 Winding inductance FLOAT32
7131 0x2106.19 Winding resistance FLOAT32
7134 0x2106.1B Torque constant FLOAT32
7143 0x2106.1D Time constant I²t FLOAT32
7146 0x2106.1F Winding temperature FLOAT32
7149 0x2106.21 Nominal motor voltage FLOAT32
3.3.1.7 PROFIdrive
PNUs
14 Use of user specific Specifies whether the user specific motor data should be adop-
motor data ted as the active motor data following reinitialisation.
– 0: motor data from the EEPROM of the encoder
– 1: user-specific motor data from device memory
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
719 Current pole pairs Specifies the number of pole pairs of the active motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
7112 Current motor inertia Specifies the inertia of the active motor used.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit kgm²
7115 Current phase Specifies whether the sequence of phases is swapped. The usu-
sequence al phase sequence for the servomotor to turn clockwise is
ascending (U, V, W). If the servomotor has the phase sequence
U, W, V, the phase sequence is reversed. 0 for the phase
sequence U, V, W and 1 for the phase sequence U, W, V. For a
stepper motor, the phase sequence for 0 is the assignment A-#A
and B-#B. For the phase sequence equal to 1, the assignment A-
#A and #B-B is. Changing the phase sequence changes the
rotating field of the motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
7118 Current nominal cur- Specifies the root mean square value of the nominal current
rent when loading the motor with the nominal torque.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
7121 Current maximum cur- Specifies the permissible root mean square value of the maxim-
rent um current that may flow through the motor in the short term.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
7124 Current maximum Specifies the current maximum velocity of the motor used.
velocity Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
7127 Current nominal velo- Specifies the current nominal velocity of the active motor.
city Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
7130 Current winding Specifies the inductance between 2 motor phases of the active
inductance servomotor. Indicates the inductance of a motor phase in a step-
per motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit H
7133 Current winding res- Specifies the winding resistance between 2 motor phases of the
istance active servomotor. Specifies the winding resistance of a motor
phase for a stepper motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Ω
7136 Current torque con- Specifies the ratio of the motor torque to the root mean square
stant value of the current of the active motor (root mean square value
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm/Arms
7139 Resulting nominal Specifies the resulting nominal torque of the active motor (cur-
torque rent nominal current x current torque constant).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
7142 Resulting maximum Specifies the resulting maximum torque of the active motor (cur-
torque rent maximum current x current torque constant).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
7145 Current time constant Specifies the duration for which the parameterised maximum
I²t current may act. In the case of a servomotor, the current set-
point is automatically limited to the rated current at the end of
the period and the corresponding diagnostic message with the
parameterised behaviour is generated (I²t monitoring). If a
thermal model is used for I²t monitoring, as for a stepper motor
with rated current=maximum current, the time constant is used
as the filter time constant.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
7148 Current winding tem- Specifies the maximum permissible winding temperature of the
perature motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
7154 Current temperature Specifies the sensor type of the temperature sensor.
sensor motor Possible sensor types
è Tab. 147 Value list of the temperature sensor parameters.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
7157 Current temperature Specifies the characteristic of the temperature sensor.
sensor characteristic – Index 0: gain
motor – Index 1: Offset
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
7160 Holding brake Specifies whether the motor has an integrated holding brake
and whether it shall be used -> data sheet of the motor.
– 0: inactive, holding brake not available
– 1: active, holding brake available
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
7163 Current switch-on Specifies the currently used switch-on delay of the holding
delay holding brake brake.
Determines how long the next command is delayed after a con-
troller enable. Using this parameter, the behaviour of the device
is adapted to the inertia of the holding brake by parameters. No
orders are processed until the switch-on delay has elapsed, so
the holding brake can release completely.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
7166 Current switch-off Specifies the current effective delay for switching off the closed-
delay holding brake loop control.
Determines how long the closed-loop controller shall hold the
current position so that the holding brake can be closed com-
pletely. Using this parameter, the behaviour of the device is
adapted to the inertia of the holding brake by parameters. The
position controller is switched off after expiration of the switch-
off delay. The holding brake should then be completely closed.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
7188 Current NOC code Specifies the order code of the motor -> product labelling of the
motor motor.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
71422 Current nominal Specifies the nominal motor voltage of the motor. An excessive
motor voltage DC link voltage can destroy the motor!
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
71425 Current continuous Specifies the effective current that the motor requires to apply
current the stall torque.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
3.3.1.10 PROFIdrive
Motor configuration PNUs
3.3.2.1 Function
The device has 1 switching output for direct connection of the holding brake in the motor.
The output is intended for the actuation of a brake that drops when the system is in a non-energised
status and holds the motor and/or axis in position.
The mechanical delay of the brake means that release and activation takes a certain length of time.
The behaviour of the device can be adapted to the mechanical delay of the brake using parameters:
Parameter Description
The controller enable (RF) is – The outputs are switched on to release the brakes (exception;
granted force operating mode with brake). The brakes release with a
mechanical delay.
– The position controller assumes the control (actual posi-
tion = setpoint position).
– The motion commands are not accepted until the paramet-
erised delay has been expired.
Tab. 160 Control of the Brakes
Manual Release of the Holding Brake or Clamping Unit
If the controller release is withdrawn, the output is reset and the holding brake is applied. The holding
brake can be released manually in this status.
Open holding brake input (configurable) The holding brake is released at high level or low
level depending on the parameterised switching
function
è 3.3.2.2 Parameters and Diagnostic Messages.
Plug-in è 2.4.2
Timing
v=0
Stop Cat. 1
RF
OP
BR+
t1 t2
brake
Name Description
The voltages for the holding brake in Px.40003 and Px.40004 may not be higher than the logic supply
voltage regardless of the parameterisation.
20 Switch-on delay hold- Determines how long the next command is delayed after a con-
ing brake 1 troller enable. No commands are processed until the switch-on
delay has elapsed so that holding brake 1 can release com-
pletely. During initial commissioning, the presets are assumed
from the motor data set. Using this parameter, the behaviour
can be adapted to application-specific concerns.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
21 Switch-off delay hold- Determines how long the closed-loop controller shall hold the
ing brake 1 current position so that the holding brake can be closed com-
pletely. The position controller is switched off after expiration of
the switch-off delay. Holding brake 1 should then be completely
closed. During initial commissioning, the presets are assumed
from the motor data set. Using this parameter, the behaviour
can be adapted to application-specific concerns.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
24 Status holding brake Specifies the status of the corresponding holding brake.
1 Possible status
è Tab. 164 Holding Brake Status Parameter Values List.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
29 Selection of holding Selection of holding brake for manual opening
brake (manual open- – 0: holding brake 1
ing) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
40002 Delay time Specifies the time with which the current reduction for the hold-
ing brake is initiated.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
40003 Supply voltage hold- Specifies the voltage supplied to the holding brake before cur-
ing brake rent reduction is initiated. The voltage is only output if the cur-
rent reduction for the holding brake is activated (Px.4001.0.0)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
40004 Holding voltage Specifies the voltage to which it is reduced after elapse of the
delay time.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
Tab. 163 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
20 0x2150.01 Switch-on delay holding brake 1 FLOAT32
21 0x2150.02 Switch-off delay holding brake 1 FLOAT32
3.3.2.4 PROFIdrive
Holding brake PNUs
3.3.3.1 Function
The Festo motor series has integrated encoders. If a Festo motor is used and the configuration is per-
formed with the device-specific plug-in, the required data for the encoder configuration is assumed
automatically in the project from the stored database with the selection of the motor.
The device has an encoder interface that supports different encoder protocols and standards.
Digital incremental encoder digital incremental encoder (differential A, B and N signals), e.g.
(with differential A, B and N sig- ROD 426 or compatible
nals)
BiSS C protocol Absolute encoders with BiSS interface that support the BiSS C
protocol.
Tab. 167 Supported Standards and Protocols
3219 Commutation angle Determines the commutation angle saved in the parameter set.
from user configura- Parameter P0.3219.0.0 is responsible for the commutation angle
tion on encoder channel 1 and parameter P0.3219.1.0 for the com-
mutation angle on encoder channel 2 (device specific).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3220 Current commutation Specifies the currently used commutation angle.
angle Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
3221 Zero point offset from Specifies the zero point offset saved in the encoder.
encoder memory Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit r
3223 Zero point offset from Determines the zero point offset saved in the parameter set.
user configuration Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit r
3224 Current zero point off- Specifies the currently used zero point offset
set Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
3225 Encoder referencing is Displays whether the homing status saved in the encoder shall
valid still be valid.
This means:
– 0: invalid
– 1: valid
Access read/−
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3226 Referencing in user Determines whether the homing status saved in the parameter
configuration is valid set shall still be valid.
This means:
– 0: invalid
– 1: valid
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3227 Current referencing is Displays whether the current homing status shall be valid.
valid This means:
– 0: invalid
– 1: valid
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
11608 Commutation angle Specifies the commutation angle saved in the encoder.
from encoder memory Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11615 Current position Specifies the current standardised position in increments
related to the output shaft of the gear unit or drive shaft of the
mechanism.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
11616 Encoder selection Determines the encoder type set to which the encoder interface
shall be set after the next reinitialisation. The selection of the
encoder type can influence the amount of supply voltage
provided for the encoder. Incorrect parameterisation can dam-
age the connected encoder due to impermissibly high supply
voltage! In case of EnDat and Hiperface encoders, this is preven-
ted by protection mechanisms.
Possible encoder types
è Tab. 170 Encoder Selection Values List (Px.11616).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11617 Active encoder Specifies the encoder type currently configured for the encoder
interface.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
11618 Velocity filter filter Determines the filter time constant of the velocity filter. The fil-
time constant ter time constant prevents or dampen signal noise in the
encoder signal.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
71500 Actual acceleration Displays the actual value of the acceleration unfiltered
value unfiltered Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Inci/s²
71501 Actual acceleration Displays the actual value of the acceleration filtered
value filtered Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Inci/s²
71502 Filter time constant Specifies the filter time constant for the actual value accelera-
acceleration filter tion filter
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 168 Encoder Parameters
Fig. 35 Selection of the gear ratio and feed constant using the gear ratio group
Name Description
Encoder selection
P0.11616.0.0 4 Instance 0 for encoder channel 1, encoder type: increment-
al encoder (A, B, N)
Tab. 171 Example: Encoder Selection
18 | 00 | 00092 Motor change detected, commut- Motor change detected, commutation angle
(301989980) ation angle invalid invalid
18 | 00 | 00093 Motor change detected, zero Motor change detected, zero point offset
(301989981) point offset invalid invalid
18 | 00 | 00094 Commutation angle in encoder Commutation angle in encoder invalid
(301989982) invalid
18 | 00 | 00095 Encoder type plate invalid Encoder type plate invalid
(301989983)
18 | 00 | 00096 Encoder type plate (user defined) Encoder type plate (user defined) invalid
(301989984) invalid
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
3219 0x2130.1F Commutation angle from user configuration SINT64
3220 0x2130.21 Current commutation angle SINT64
3221 0x2130.23 Zero point offset from encoder memory SINT64
3223 0x2130.25 Zero point offset from user configuration SINT64
3224 0x2130.27 Current zero point offset SINT64
3225 0x2130.29 Encoder referencing is valid BOOL
3226 0x2130.2B Referencing in user configuration is valid BOOL
3227 0x2130.2D Current referencing is valid BOOL
3228 0x2130.2F Valid commutation angle from encoder BOOL
memory
3229 0x2130.31 Valid commutation angle from user configura- BOOL
tion
3230 0x2130.33 Current commutation angle valid BOOL
3234 0x2130.39 Electrical angular frequency filtered FLOAT32
3236 0x2130.3D Deactivation motor change check BOOL
3237 0x2130.3F Encoder permanently homed BOOL
3250 0x2130.59 Activation automatic encoder detection BOOL
3251 0x2130.5B Selection gear ratio group UINT8
11600 0x2130.5D Standardised encoder position SINT64
11601 0x2130.5F Absolute position in user units SINT64
11602 0x2130.61 Velocity in user units FLOAT32
11603 0x2130.63 Filtered velocity in user units FLOAT32
11604 0x2130.65 Electrical angle UINT32
11605 0x2130.67 Electrical angular frequency FLOAT32
3.3.3.4 PROFIdrive
PNUs for encoder channels 1/2
10040 Encoder resolution Specifies the number of increments per Encoder revolution.
Parameter P0.10040.0.0 for the encoder at encoder interface 1
and parameter P0.10040.1.0 for the encoder at encoder inter-
face 2 (device specific).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Inc/r
10041 Raw value position Specifies the raw position value delivered by the single-turn
encoder in increments.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10042 Raw value number of Specifies the raw value of the number of revolutions determined
revolutions by the single-turn encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10043 Quadrature evalu- Determines how the quadrature signal of the encoder shall be
ation evaluated.
This means:
– 1: single evaluation
– 2: double evaluation
– 4: quadruple evaluation
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
10044 Activate of position Determines whether the position value is automatically correc-
correction when zero ted to 0 in the case of a zero pulse from the incremental
pulse encoder.
This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: active
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 175 Parameters of Digital Incremental Encoders (A, B and N Signals)
Encoder selection
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
10040 0x2138.01 Encoder resolution UINT16
10041 0x2138.04 Raw value position UINT16
10042 0x2138.07 Raw value number of revolutions SINT16
10043 0x2138.0A Quadrature evaluation UINT8
10044 0x2138.0D Activate of position correction when zero BOOL
pulse
Tab. 178 Objects
3.3.3.7 PROFIdrive
PNUs for digital incremental encoders (A, B and N signals)
3601 Resolution single turn Specifies the resolution in bits per revolution.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3602 Resolution multiturn Specifies the number of bits for the distinguishable revolutions
of the multiturn scanning of the encoder.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3603 Single-turn position Specifies the current position of the singleturn scanning of the
encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
3604 Multi-turn numerator Specifies the current position of the multiturn scanning of the
encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
3610 CRC BiSS-C Specifies the size of the BiSS-C checksum in bits.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
3612 Baud rate Defines the baud rate at which the encoder data is transmitted.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3613 Activation of correc- Determines whether the correction table of the encoder is used.
tion table This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: active
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
3618 Activation read out Defines whether the extended encoder data of the encoder
extended encoder should be used.
data This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: active
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
3624 unused unused
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 180 Parameters of Encoders with the BiSS C Protocol
18 | 05 | 00239 BiSS-C encoder analysis invalid Check the wiring of the encoder and the posi-
(302317807) tion resolution of the BiSS-C protocol.
Tab. 181 Diagnostic Messages for Encoders with BiSS-C Protocol
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
3601 0x21A2.01 Resolution single turn UINT32
3602 0x21A2.02 Resolution multiturn UINT32
3603 0x21A2.03 Single-turn position UINT32
3604 0x21A2.04 Multi-turn numerator UINT32
3610 0x21A2.0A CRC BiSS-C UINT8
3612 0x21A2.0C Baud rate UINT32
3613 0x21A2.0D Activation of correction table BOOL
3618 0x21A2.0E Activation read out extended encoder data BOOL
3624 0x21A2.14 unused STRING(20)
Tab. 182 Objects
3.3.3.10 PROFIdrive
PNUs for encoders with BiSS
122 Encoder channel 1 Determines the encoder interface to which the encoder is con-
position nection whose values shall be evaluated by the positional con-
troller. 0 for encoder interface 1 (primary encoder) at connection
[X2] and 1 for encoder interface 2 (secondary encoder) at con-
nection [X3] (device specific).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
128 Actual position value Specifies the current actual position value of the primary
encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1210 Actual velocity value Specifies the velocity measured by the primary encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1212 Electrical angle Specifies the electrical angle used by the commutation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1213 Electrical angular fre- Specifies the electrical angular frequency used by the commuta-
quency tion.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Hz
Tab. 184 Parameters of the Actual Value Management
3.3.3.13 PROFIdrive
PNUs of actual value management
1170 Reversing the direc- Determines whether the reversal of the direction of rotation
tion of rotation shall be activated.
This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: active
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1171 Invert encoder signal Determines whether the encoder signal shall be inverted.
This means:
– 0: inactive (do not invert the encoder signal)
– 1: active (invert the encoder signal)
One encoder is allocated to every index
è Index for the Invert Encoder Signal Parameter (Px.1171)
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1172 Phase rotation Specifies whether the sequence of phases is swapped. The usu-
al phase sequence for the servomotor to turn clockwise is
ascending (U, V, W). If the servomotor has the phase sequence
U, W, V, the phase sequence is reversed. 0 for the phase
sequence U, V, W and 1 for the phase sequence U, W, V. For a
stepper motor, the phase sequence for 0 is the assignment A-#A
and B-#B. For the phase sequence equal to 1, the assignment A-
#A and #B-B is. Changing the phase sequence changes the
rotating field of the motor.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 187 Parameters of the Direction of Rotation Manager
8
9
Tab. 188 Index for the Invert Encoder Signal Parameter (Px.1171)
3.3.3.16 PROFIdrive
PNUs of direction of rotation manager
ing the commutation-angle detection. After a successful commutation-angle detection, the parameter
set must be saved on the device.
660 Status of state Specifies the status of the state machine of the commutation-
machine commutation angle detection.
finding Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
661 Commutation finding Specifies the status of the commutation-angle detection.
status Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
662 Time current increase Determines the time duration of the current rise ramp for the
commutation-angle detection.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
664 Increments Determines the increment for the commutation-angle detection.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
668 Mode Determines the mode of the commutation-angle detection.
This means:
– 0: always (at each controller enable)
– 1: automatic (only once at the first controller enable)
– 2: off
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
669 Velocity Determines the set velocity for the commutation-angle detec-
tion.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
660 0x216B.01 Status of state machine commutation finding UINT32
661 0x216B.02 Commutation finding status UINT32
662 0x219C.03 Time current increase FLOAT32
664 0x216B.04 Increments FLOAT32
668 0x216B.06 Mode UINT32
669 0x216B.07 Velocity FLOAT32
6691 0x216B.0A Acceleration FLOAT32
6692 0x216B.0B Jerk FLOAT32
6693 0x216B.0C Monitoring window angle FLOAT32
6694 0x219C.14 Factor current setpoint value FLOAT32
Tab. 193 Objects
3.3.3.19 PROFIdrive
PNUs for commutation-angle detection
18 | 00 | 00092 Motor change detected, commut- Motor change detected, commutation angle
(301989980) ation angle invalid invalid
18 | 00 | 00093 Motor change detected, zero Motor change detected, zero point offset
(301989981) point offset invalid invalid
Tab. 195 Diagnostic Messages
3.3.4.1 Function
The device supports the use of several gear units within a drive chain. During configuration, the cor-
rect transmission ratio for each gear unit used must be specified. The transmission ratio is specified
using the gear ratio. The gear ratio consists of a numerator and denominator. The numerator indicates
the number of revolutions on the drive side of the gear unit and the denominator indicates the number
of resulting revolutions on the output side of the gear unit.
1242 Total conversion Determines the numerator of the overall gear ratio (drive side).
factor gear unit Access read/write
numerator
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1243 Total conversion Determines the denominator of the overall gear ratio (output
factor gear unit side).
denominator Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1194 Feed constant numer- Determines the numerator of the feed constant (data type
ator UINT32).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
1195 Feed constant denom- Determines the denominator of the feed constant (data type
inator UINT32).
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 196 Parameter for gear ratio group 0
The following parameters form gear ratio group 1 and 2:
11591 Numerator gear unit Determines the numerator of the gear ratio for the user-defined
(user defined) gear unit (drive side).
Index 0: gear ratio group 1
Index 1: gear ratio group 2
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11592 Denominator gear Determines the denominator of the gear ratio for the user-
unit (user defined) defined gear unit (output side).
Index 0: gear ratio group 1
Index 1: gear ratio group 2
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11593 Numerator feed con- Determines the numerator of the user-defined feed constant
stant (user defined) (data type UINT32).
Index 0: gear ratio group 1
Index 1: gear ratio group 2
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11594 Denominator feed Determines the denominator of the user-defined feed constant
constant (user (data type UINT32).
defined) Index 0: gear ratio group 1
Index 1: gear ratio group 2
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
Tab. 197 Parameters of gear ratio groups 1 and 2
Parameter from the drive configuration
If a drive configuration was performed using the plug-in, the parameters named in the following table
are assumed from the drive configuration. The plug-in calculates the numerator from parameters
Px.1232, Px.1233, Px.1236, Px.1237, Px.1240 and Px.1241 and the denominator of the overall trans-
mission ratio of the gear ratio group 0 (Px.1242 and Px.1243).
For the closed-loop controller, the gear ratio of the selected gear ratio group is relevant è Fig.35.
If the gear ratio group 0 is selected, parameters Px.1242 and Px.1243 calculated by the plug-in can be
changed as required. The change has no influence on the abovementioned parameters from the drive
configuration (Px.1232, Px.1233, etc.).
1230 Database ID gear unit Specifies the database ID of the first gear unit.
1 Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1231 NOC code gear unit 1 Specifies the order code of the first configured gear unit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1232 Conversion factor Specifies the numerator of the gear ratio for the first gear unit
gear unit 1 numerator (drive side).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1233 Conversion factor Specifies the denominator of the gear ratio for the first gear unit
gear unit 1 denomin- (output side).
ator Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1234 Database ID gear unit Specifies the database ID of the second gear unit.
2 Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1235 NOC code gear unit 2 Specifies the order code of the second configured gear unit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1236 Conversion factor Specifies the numerator of the gear ratio for the second gear
gear unit 2 numerator unit (drive side).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1237 Conversion factor Specifies the numerator of the gear ratio for the second gear
gear unit 2 denomin- unit (output side).
ator Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1238 Database ID gear unit Specifies the database ID of the third gear unit.
3 Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1239 NOC code gear unit 3 Specifies the order code of the third configured gear unit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1240 Conversion factor Specifies the numerator of the gear ratio for the third gear unit
gear unit 3 numerator (drive side).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1241 Conversion factor Specifies the denominator of the gear ratio for the third gear
gear unit 3 denomin- unit (output side).
ator Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 198 Parameter from the drive configuration
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1230 0x2182.01 Database ID gear unit 1 UINT32
1231 0x2182.02 NOC code gear unit 1 STRING(37)
1232 0x2182.03 Conversion factor gear unit 1 numerator UINT32
1233 0x2182.04 Conversion factor gear unit 1 denominator UINT32
1234 0x2182.05 Database ID gear unit 2 UINT32
1235 0x2182.06 NOC code gear unit 2 STRING(37)
1236 0x2182.07 Conversion factor gear unit 2 numerator UINT32
1237 0x2182.08 Conversion factor gear unit 2 denominator UINT32
1238 0x2182.09 Database ID gear unit 3 UINT32
1239 0x2182.0A NOC code gear unit 3 STRING(37)
1240 0x2182.0B Conversion factor gear unit 3 numerator UINT32
1241 0x2182.0C Conversion factor gear unit 3 denominator UINT32
Tab. 201 Objects
3.3.4.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs for gear ratio group 0
3.3.5.1 Function
The function of the digital inputs and outputs listed here can be parameterised. The signals at the
digital inputs trigger the parameterised function (e.g. “Release holding brake”). The signals at the
digital outputs map the parameterised signal (e.g. “Objective reached”).
The status of the inputs and outputs of the interfaces [X1A] and [X1C] is mapped to the parameters
Px.10151 and Px.10152. The status of the respective inputs and outputs can be recorded by recording
the parameters with the measurement data recording (trace).
Parameters and Diagnostic Messages
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11202 Digital input X1A.8 Specifies the function of the digital input signal at connection
X1A.8.
Possible functions
è Tab. 209 Configurable Input Signals at X1A.7 and X1A.8.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11203 Digital output X1A.9 Specifies the function of the digital output signal at connection
X1A.9.
Possible signals
è Tab. 212 Configurable Output Signals at X1A.9 and X1A.10.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11204 Digital output X1A.10 Specifies the function of the digital output signal at connection
X1A.10.
Possible signals
è Tab. 212 Configurable Output Signals at X1A.9 and X1A.10.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
11205 Digital input X1C.2 Specifies the function of the digital input signal at connection
X1C.2.
Possible signals è Tab. 210 Configurable Input Signals at X1C.2.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
101200 Reference switch con- Determines the configuration of the reference switch.
figuration Possible switching functions
è Tab. 211 Switching Function of the Reference Switch.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1128054 Digital outputs Digital output image CiA402
CiA402 Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 205 Parameter
8 Negative hardware limit switch The input shows the exceeding of the usable range in a
9 Positive hardware limit switch negative or positive direction. The switching function
can be set with parameters Px.101100 and Px.101101
(N/C or N/O contact). For more information, see
è 5.5 Hardware limit switch reached
11 Record table input 0 The input can be used as a step enabling condition
12 Record table input 1 during record selection (ID Px.1831 = 4).
10 Reference switch The input returns the signal of the reference switch.
Tab. 210 Configurable Input Signals at X1C.2
12 Drive referenced The output becomes active when the drive is being
homed.
13 Target position reached The output becomes active when the actual position
remains in the target window for the duration of the
damping time.
14 Target velocity reached The output becomes active when the actual velocity is
within the target window for the duration of the damp-
ing time.
15 Target torque reached The output becomes active when the actual torque is
within the target window for the duration of the damp-
ing time.
16 Position: following error The output becomes active when the corresponding
17 Velocity: following error following error is present after the operate delay has
expired.
18 Target range position The output becomes active after the target range is
19 Target range velocity reached and becomes inactive again when the target
range is left.
20 Target range torque
21 Positive hardware limit switch The output provides the logical signal of the corres-
22 Negative hardware limit switch ponding limit switch.
23 Positive SW limit switch The output becomes active if the software end position
24 Negative SW limit switch has been exceeded.
27 Limit stop reached The output becomes active when a stop ramp is oper-
ated.
28 Positive stroke limitation The output becomes active if the stroke limitation has
29 Negative stroke limitation been exceeded in the corresponding direction.
30 Velocity limit value The output becomes active when the velocity monitor-
ing indicates the exceeding of the limit value.
31 Pushback The output becomes active when the set torque and
direction of movement do not correlate and the para-
meterised damping time has expired.
32 MC The output provides the “Motion Complete” signal.
33 Record table output 0 The output becomes active if the output has been set
34 Record table output 1 using the record table.
06 | 00 | 00085 Digital I/O configuration invalid The configuration of the digital inputs or out-
(100663381) puts is invalid
Tab. 213 Diagnostic Messages
3.3.5.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs of digital inputs and outputs
637 Scaling factor start Specifies the scaling factor for the start value based on the limit
value I²t monitoring value of the I²t monitoring of the power output stage at stand-
power output stage still.
Access read/−
6315 Scaling factor maxim- Displays the scaling factor for the maximum value based on the
um value after drive limit value, after drive is at standstill.
at standstill Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6316 Actual value I²t monit- Specifies the actual value for I²t monitoring of the power output
oring power output stage at standstill.
stage at standstill Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit A²s
6317 Scaling factor warning Specifies the scaling factor for the warning limit based on the
limit I²t monitoring limit value of the I²t monitoring of the power output stage if the
drive at standstill drive is at standstill.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6332 Actual value relative Specifies the actual value for relative I²t monitoring of the power
I²t monitoring of output stage to the limit.
power output stage to Access read/−
limit
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6333 Actual value relative Specifies the actual value for relative I²t monitoring of the power
I²t monitoring of output stage at standstill to the limit.
power output stage at Access read/−
standstill to limit
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6334 Actual value I²t monit- Specifies the current actual value of the I²t monitoring of the
oring of the total cur- total current.
rent Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
Tab. 216 Parameters of “I²t monitoring of power output stage”
01 | 02 | 00014 I²t monitoring: output stage warn- I²t monitoring: output stage warning limit
(16908302) ing limit
01 | 02 | 00015 I²t monitoring: output stage error I²t monitoring: output stage error limit
(16908303) limit
01 | 02 | 00016 I²t monitoring: output stage v0 I²t monitoring: output stage in standstill warn-
(16908304) warning limit ing limit
01 | 02 | 00017 I²t monitoring: output stage v0 I²t monitoring: output stage in standstill error
(16908305) error limit limit
Tab. 217 Diagnostic messages of “I²t monitoring of the power output stage”
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
637 0x216A.07 Scaling factor start value I²t monitoring power FLOAT32
output stage
638 0x216A.08 Limit value I²t monitoring power output stage FLOAT32
639 0x216A.09 Scaling factor maximum value after switching FLOAT32
on
6310 0x216A.0A Actual value I²t monitoring power output stage FLOAT32
6311 0x216A.0B Scaling factor warning limit I²t monitoring FLOAT32
power output stage
6313 0x216A.0C Scaling factor start value I²t monitoring power FLOAT32
output stage at standstill
6314 0x216A.0D Limit value I²t monitoring power output stage FLOAT32
at standstill
6315 0x216A.0E Scaling factor maximum value after drive at FLOAT32
standstill
6316 0x216A.0F Actual value I²t monitoring power output stage FLOAT32
at standstill
6317 0x216A.10 Scaling factor warning limit I²t monitoring FLOAT32
drive at standstill
6332 0x216A.1E Actual value relative I²t monitoring of power FLOAT32
output stage to limit
3.4.1.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of the I²t monitoring of the power output stage
Name Description
6302 Actual value I²T mon- Displays the actual value of I²t monitoring from the motor mod-
itoring motor model el.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6301 Scaling factor start Specifies the scaling factor for setting the start value for I²t mon-
value I²t monitoring itoring based on the limit value of I²t monitoring of the motor
motor model model.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6305 Scaling factor warning Specifies the scaling factor for setting the warning limit for I²t
limit I²t monitoring monitoring based on the limit value of I²t monitoring of the
motor model motor model.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6303 Maximum start value Specifies the maximum permissible start value of I²t monitoring
I²t monitoring motor of the motor model.
model Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 221 Parameters of I²t monitoring of motor
01 | 02 | 00259 I²t monitoring: motor model error I²t monitoring: motor model error limit
(16908547) limit
01 | 02 | 00258 I²T monitoring: motor model I²T monitoring: motor model warning limit
(16908546) warning limit
Tab. 222 Diagnostic messages of I²t monitoring of the motor
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
6302 0x21A5.02 Actual value I²T monitoring motor model FLOAT32
6301 0x21A5.01 Scaling factor start value I²t monitoring motor FLOAT32
model
6305 0x21A5.04 Scaling factor warning limit I²t monitoring FLOAT32
motor model
6303 0x21A5.03 Maximum start value I²t monitoring motor FLOAT32
model
Tab. 223 Objects
3.4.2.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of I²t monitoring of motor
920 Temperature power Specifies the current actual temperature value of the power out-
output stage put stage.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
921 Temperature status Specifies the status of the temperature monitoring of the power
power output stage output stage
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
9314 Upper limit value Determines the upper limit value of warning threshold for the
warning threshold temperature monitoring of the power output stage.
power output stage Access read/write
temperature
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
9315 Upper limit value Determines the upper limit value of the temperature monitoring
power output stage of the power output stage.
temperature Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
9316 Lower limit value Determines the lower limit value of warning threshold for the
warning threshold temperature monitoring of the power output stage.
power output stage Access read/write
temperature
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
9317 Lower limit value Determines the lower limit value of the temperature monitoring
power output stage of the power output stage.
temperature Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
9322 Current upper limit Specifies the current upper limit value of the warning threshold
value warning for the temperature monitoring of the power output stage.
threshold power out- Access read/−
put stage temperat-
Update effective immediately
ure
Unit °C
9323 Current upper limit Specifies the current upper limit value of the temperature monit-
value power output oring of the power output stage.
stage temperature Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
9324 Current lower limit Specifies the current lower limit value of the warning threshold
value warning for the temperature monitoring of the power output stage.
threshold power out- Access read/−
put stage temperat-
Update effective immediately
ure
Unit °C
9325 Current lower limit Specifies the current lower limit value of the temperature monit-
value power output oring of the power output stage.
stage temperature Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit °C
Tab. 225 Parameters of “Temperature monitoring of the servo drive”
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
920 0x2128.01 Temperature power output stage FLOAT32
921 0x2128.02 Temperature status power output stage SINT32
9314 0x2128.19 Upper limit value warning threshold power FLOAT32
output stage temperature
9315 0x2128.1A Upper limit value power output stage temper- FLOAT32
ature
9316 0x2128.1B Lower limit value warning threshold power FLOAT32
output stage temperature
9317 0x2128.1C Lower limit value power output stage temper- FLOAT32
ature
9322 0x2128.21 Current upper limit value warning threshold FLOAT32
power output stage temperature
9323 0x2128.22 Current upper limit value power output stage FLOAT32
temperature
9324 0x2128.23 Current lower limit value warning threshold FLOAT32
power output stage temperature
9325 0x2128.24 Current lower limit value power output stage FLOAT32
temperature
Tab. 226 Objects
3.4.3.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs "temperature monitoring of the servo drive"
491 Load voltage root Specifies the load voltage root mean square value.
mean square value Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
493 Lower load voltage Determines the lower limit value for load voltage monitoring.
limit value Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
494 Upper load voltage Determines the upper limit value for load voltage monitoring.
value Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
28151 Current lower limit Specifies the lower limit value for load voltage monitoring.
value load voltage Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
28152 Current upper limit Specifies the upper limit value for load voltage monitoring.
value load voltage Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
Tab. 228 Mains voltage monitoring parameter
CiA 402
Mains voltage monitoring objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
490 0x2115.01 Load voltage peak value FLOAT32
491 0x2115.02 Load voltage root mean square value FLOAT32
492 0x2115.03 Actual rectified load voltage value FLOAT32
493 0x2115.04 Lower load voltage limit value FLOAT32
494 0x2115.05 Upper load voltage value FLOAT32
495 0x2115.06 Actual load voltage frequency value FLOAT32
4995 0x2115.12 Status load voltage BOOL
5113 0x2115.15 Activation DC voltage supply BOOL
28140 0x2115.17 Load voltage frequency minimum FLOAT32
28150 0x2115.18 Maximum load voltage frequency FLOAT32
28151 0x2115.19 Current lower limit value load voltage FLOAT32
PROFIdrive
Mains voltage monitoring PNUs
If the maximum permissible DC link voltage exceeded, a Category 0 stop is performed and the drive
slowly comes to a stop.
480 Actual value DC link Specifies the current actual value of the DC link voltage.
voltage Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
4811 Warning thresholds Determine the warning threshold for the monitoring of the DC
DC link voltage link voltage.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
4813 Upper limit value DC Determines the upper limit value for the monitoring of the DC
link voltage link voltage.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
4814 Lower limit value DC Determines the lower limit value for the monitoring of the DC
link voltage link voltage.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
56799 Current warning Specifies the currently used warning threshold for monitoring
threshold DC link the DC link voltage.
voltage Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
56800 Current upper limit Specifies the currently used upper limit value for monitoring the
value DC link voltage DC link voltage.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
56801 Current lower limit Specifies the currently used lower limit value for monitoring the
value DC link voltage DC link voltage.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
Tab. 232 Parameters of “Monitoring of the DC link voltage”
CiA 402
PROFIdrive
10181 DC link recovery deac- Voltage from which the DC link recovery is deactivated
tivation Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
10182 DC link recovery DC link recovery status
status Access read/−
Update effective immediately
102105 Maximum reactive Maximum reactive current of the reactive current braking
current reactive cur- Access read/−
rent braking
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
102106 Actual value reactive Actual value of the reactive current braking
current braking Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
102107 Activation automatic Activation of the automatic voltage determination
voltage determination Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
102108 Switch-on threshold Switch-on threshold of the reactive current braking
reactive current brak- Access read/write
ing
Update effective immediately
Unit V
102109 End value reactive End value for the reactive current braking
current braking Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit V
Tab. 236 Parameter
CiA 402
Return energy feed objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
10181 0x213F.01 DC link recovery deactivation FLOAT32
10182 0x213F.02 DC link recovery status BOOL
10184 0x213F.04 Activation automatic voltage determination BOOL
10185 0x213F.05 Power feedback switch-off threshold FLOAT32
10186 0x213F.06 Scaling factor offset of voltage calculation FLOAT32
PROFIdrive
Return energy feed PNUs
4 Motion Control
4.1 Operating Modes
4.1.1 Finite State Machine
The internal finite state machine defines how the available operating statuses of the device are
changed.
If the device completes the start-up phase without error, it automatically switches to the Ready status.
If the closed-loop controller and the output stage are enabled, depending on the parameterisation the
device automatically switches to the status Standstill or the status Profile è Px.10234. The required
operating mode can be activated in the Standstill status, e. g. by the device profile or the device-spe-
cific plug-in.
Fig. 38
Statuses Description
Not ready The device is not ready because a precondition is not fulfilled,
e. g. an encoder is not selected, or DC link voltage is not connec-
ted.
Disabled The device is blocked. The output stage is locked and switched
off.
Ready The device is ready. The output stage is switched off. The brake
can be set and released manually è 3.3.2 Brake Control.
Enabling The power output stage is switched on.
Standstill The device is ready for operation and it is position-controlled.
Statuses Description
Halt The current command was aborted via the device profile
è 4.3 Hold.
Note 1 The transition to the Disabled status occurs status occurs if the
output stage enable is cancelled or a safety stop is requested
(e.g. STO).
Note 2 The transition to the Not ready status occurs, e.g., if the connec-
tion to the encoder is interrupted or the re-initialisation is reques-
ted or the intermediate circuit is not charged.
Note 3 The transition to the Ready status occurs once all preconditions
have been fulfilled.
Note 4 Automatic switch to the Standstill status if the output stage
enable is not exclusively via the CTRL-EN input
è 4.1.9 Switch-on/off Behaviour and Closed-loop Controller
Enable.
Note 5 Automatic transition to the Profile status if the output stage
enable is exclusively via the CTRL-EN input
è 4.1.9 Switch-on/off Behaviour and Closed-loop Controller
Enable.
RF Closed-loop controller and output stage enable
è 4.1.9 Switch-on/off Behaviour and Closed-loop Controller
Enable.
Stop Cat. Stop of the corresponding category
Profile operating modes The servo drive uses the integrated trajectory
– Positioning mode(PP) generator to generate the relevant setpoint
– Velocity mode (PV) quantities.
– Force/torque mode (PT)
Cyclic synchronised ... The command values are specified at equidistant
– ... positioning mode (CSP) time points via fieldbus, e. g. via EtherCAT. The
– ... velocity mode (CSV) time-equidistant command values are input by a
– ... force/torque mode (CST) fine interpolator of the closed-loop controller.
Tab. 241 Operating modes for performing motion commands
The cyclically synchronised operating modes are only available in the CiA402 profile.
From... To...
PP PV PT CSP CSV CST HM PT-B
PP – a a c c c c c
PV a – a c c c c c
PT a a – c c c c c
CSP d d d – e e d d
CSV d d d e – e d d
CST d d d e e – d d
From... To...
PP PV PT CSP CSV CST HM PT-B
HM MC MC MC MC MC MC – MC
PT-B d d d d d d d –
P a a a d d d d d
V a a a d d d d d
T a a a d d d d d
Tab. 242 Operating mode switch – part 1
Meaning
a The dynamic switch between the operating modes is possible at any time.
b Dynamic switching is possible.
Unwanted command value jumps after switching the operating mode must be avoided by
input corresponding command value specification by the user or by the higher-order PLC
(reconciliation between setpoint and actual value).
c One of the following conditions must be met for switching the operating mode:
– The current motion command has been closed by MC.
– The current motion command has been aborted by a stop.
Once the request for a switch of operating mode has been accepted, no more motion
commands are accepted until the operating mode switch is complete (message).
Unwanted command value jumps after switching the operating mode must be avoided by
input corresponding command value specification by the user or by the higher-order con-
troller (reconciliation between setpoint and actual value).
d The current motion command must be terminated by a stop before the new operating
mode can be requested.
e The dynamic switching of the operating mode is possible at any time if the required com-
mand values for the operating modes are mapped in the cyclic process data
è 4.1.2 Operating modes for performing motion commands.
MC Motion complete
HM Homing
Tab. 243 Operating mode switch – part 2
4.1.2.2 CiA402
If a dynamic switch between the CSP, CSV and CST operating modes is required, the following objects
must be mapped in the cyclic process data:
– Modes of operation (0x6060)
– Mode of operation display (0x6061)
– the required setpoint and actual values of the operating modes
The following graph shows an example of the switch from the CSV operating mode to the CSP operat-
ing mode.
control Drive
device
(2)
RPDO: Mode_of_Operation = CSP / Controlword / Target velocity / Target position
(3)
4.1.3.1 Function
In the positioning profile position operating mode, the theoretical path curve is calculated by the
integrated trajectory generator (Profile position mode). The trajectory for the target position is calcu-
lated based on the motion quantities for the profile velocity, the acceleration, the deceleration and the
jerk. If the value 0 is defined for the final velocity and no other command is triggered, the drive
remains position-controlled at the target position. In positioning mode, the position, velocity and cur-
rent regulators are active. The following types of position specification are supported in positioning
mode:
Relative to the current setpoint Distance referenced to the last setpoint position
position
Relative to the last target posi- Distance referenced to the last target position
tion
Tab. 244 Variations of Positioning Mode
Relative position specifications may result in an overflow of the internally mapped position. In the
event of an overflow the parameterised reaction is executed. The reaction must be taken into account
by a higher-order controller.
In positioning mode new commands can be triggered at any time. The current command may be abor-
ted, or the new command appended in a buffer. A jerk-free switch between the PP, PV and PT profile
operating modes is possible.
Monitoring Functions
The monitoring functions marked with a dot are effective in this operating mode:
·
6 TMX Position target area monitoring
·
7 TMV Velocity target area monitoring
8 TMT Torque target area monitoring –
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
13 HLN Hardware limit switch reached negative
·
14 SLP Software end position reached positive
·
15 SLN Software limit position reached negative
·
16 STX Standstill monitoring position/velocity
·
17 STV Standstill monitoring velocity
·
18 LS Stop reached
·
21 VM Velocity monitoring
22 PB Pushback monitoring –
·
23 RDX Remaining distance monitoring
·
24 MC Trajectory completed
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
·
28 ACC Drive accelerated
·
29 DEC Drive decelerated
30… 31 – Reserved –
Timing
Example: positioning command with end velocity and unequal specifications for acceleration and
deceleration
8.0
x 6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
2.0
v
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1.0
a
0.5
0.0
- 0.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1.0
j 0.5
0.0
- 0.5
- 1.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Name Description
x Position
v Velocity
a Acceleration
j Jerk
Tab. 247 Legend for Positioning Mode Timing Graph
Trajectory Position
generator control law
parameters parameters
Fig. 42 Overview of the trajectory generator - position control operating mode (PP)
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword
(0x6041)
Target position
(0x607A)
Limit Target
Software position limit Function Multiplier position
(0x607D)
Polarity
(0x607E)
Polarity
(0x607E) Profile
velocity Position
Profile velocity
or demand
(0x6081)
End value
End velocity Position
Multiplier velocity Trajectory (0x6062)
(0x6082) control
generator
Limit function
Max profile velocity
Function
(0x607F)
Minimum
Max. motor speed
comparator
(0x6080)
Profile acceleration
(0x6083)
Profile deceleration
(0x6084) Profile acceleration or
Quick stop deceleration profile deceleration or
(0x6085) Limit quick stop deceleration
Function
Max acceleration
(0x60C5)
Max deceleration
(0x60C6)
Bit1) Description
8 6 5 4
Positioning type
0 0 x x absolute
0 1 x x relative; the reference point is defined in object 60F2h (Position-
ing option code).
Set new motion command
0 x 0 0à1 If a motion command is currently running, the new motion com-
mand is saved. The new motion command is started on comple-
tion of the previous motion command.
Start motion command immediately
0 x 1 0à1 The new motion command is started immediately.
Stop or continue motion command
0 x x 0 The motion command is run or continued with the acceleration
ramp of the current motion command.
Bit 4 must not be 0 but must not toggle. A rising edge in the stop
status results in the motion command being aborted.
1 x x x The motion command is interrupted with the stated deceleration
è object 0x6084 Profile deceleration.
0 0 New target position relative to the last target position (Target pos-
ition) of the last motion command (relative to 0, if no last motion
command is available).
0 1 New target position relative to the current setpoint position, out-
put of path generator or current setpoint position of setpoint man-
agement.
1 0 New target position relative to the current actual position, current
actual position of the actual value management.
1 1 reserved
Tab. 250 Reference point for relative positioning
Bit1) Description
13 12 10
Target position reached (Target reached) (depending on Bit 8 (Halt) in Controlword 0x6040)
x x 0 Halt = 0: target position has not yet been reached
x x 1 Halt = 0: target position has been reached
x x 0 Halt = 1: drive decelerated
x x 1 Halt = 1: velocity = 0
Motion command acknowledged (setpoint acknowledge)
x 0 x Wait for new motion command
x 1 x Motion command has been acknowledged
Position following error
0 x x Position following error in tolerance range
1 x x Position following error limit reached
1) Signal status: 0 = low; 1 = high
Tab. 251 Monitoring positioning mode
4.1.3.3 PROFIdrive
Control and Monitoring
Application class è Finite State Machine Positioning Mode in Application Class 3
SATZANW è Record Selection (SATZANW)
AKTSATZ è 12.4.7.16 Active Record (AKTSATZ)
Positioning Mode PNUs
000279
Tab. 254 Legend for timing diagram fixed stop not reached
Example 3: travel to fixed stop with reaching and feedback at the fixed stop
Positive Limit Stroke limit positive for detection of a fixed stop 11280408
of Limit Stop
Movement
Window
Fixed Stop Fixed Stop –
Tab. 255 Legend for timing diagram fixed stop feeds back
Parameter
Details of the motion monitoring functions è 5.1 Motion monitoring functions.
The fixed stop detection acts like the following error monitor for position with critical limit and timing
è 5.3 Following error. The following error of the position and a damping time are used (Px.4694,
Px.4693).
The detection of the pending clamping torque acts like the target range monitor for torque with critical
limit and timing è 5.4 Target area monitoring.
The monitoring of the stroke limits after detected fixed stop acts like the stroke limit reached motion
monitor è 5.9 Stroke limit reached.
The window limits can be set in the positive and negative directions (Px.11280408, Px.11280409
è Tab. 256 Parameter).
If the motion leaves the monitoring window in the positive and negative direction it is detected and
triggers the following diagnostic message:
– Monitoring window of fixed stop left: Dx.05 | 02 | 00280
The following parameter determines the braking behaviour on exit of the monitoring window:
– Activation of automatic stop ramp stroke limit: Px.4675
The clamping torque depends on the direction of motion. The set clamping torque is added with the
offset. This means that the resulting clamping torque depends on the sign of the offset.
An asymmetrical clamping torque can be set with the offset for suspended axes (parameter Clamping
torque offset, Px.11280407).
4693 Fixed stop detection Determines the damping time for the fixed stop detection. If the
damping time absolute value of the following error for the specified time is
above the limit value following error (Px.4694), the signal is set.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
4694 Limit value following Specifies the limit value for the fixed stop detection. Is com-
error pared with the absolute value of the following error for fixed
stop detection.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280409 Stroke limit negative Specifies the negative stroke limit for detection of a fixed stop.
for detection of a The negative stroke limit must be lower than the positive stroke
fixed stop limit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280408 Stroke limit positive Specifies the positive stroke limit for detection of a fixed stop.
for detection of a The negative stroke limit must be lower than the positive stroke
fixed stop limit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4675 Activation of automat- Specifies whether automatic braking should be activated. If
ic stop ramp stroke automatic braking is active, the drive is decelerated so that it
limit stops before the stroke limit, if possible. If automatic braking is
deactivated, the drive is only stopped once it reaches the stroke
limit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4665 Damping time target Specifies the damping time for target area monitoring (move-
range ment to a fixed stop). Minimum duration that the threshold
value can be exceeded before a message is generated. The
damping time is restarted if the actual value is below the
threshold value or if the prefix for the specified setpoint value
changes during the evaluation of the damping time.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
4668 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for the target torque. The mon-
torque itoring window is set symmetrically to the target value (window
width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
526801 Clamping torque Specifies the offset for the clamping torque for the approach to
the fixed stop.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
11280407 Clamping torque off- Specifies the offset for the clamping torque during approach to
set the fixed stop. The offset moves the clamping torque in order to
retain an asymmetrical limit, e.g. for a vertical axis.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
11280606 Acceleration MDI Displays the acceleration for the setpoint direct input MDI.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Inci/s²
11280607 Deceleration MDI Displays the deceleration for the direct-value setpoint MDI.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Inci/s²
11280604 Target position MDI Displays the target position for the setpoint direct MDI.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280605 Profile speed MDI Displays the profile speed for the direct-value setpoint MDI.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 256 Parameter
05 | 02 | 00279 Fixed stop not detected Fixed stop was not detected
(84017431)
05 | 02 | 00280 Monitoring window of fixed stop Monitoring window of fixed stop left
(84017432) left
Tab. 258 Diagnostic messages
4.1.4.1 Function
In the velocity mode profile position operating mode, the theoretical velocity curve is calculated by the
integrated trajectory generator (Profile velocity mode). The trajectory for the target velocity is calcu-
lated based on the motion quantities for the profile velocity, the acceleration, the deceleration and the
jerk.
In velocity mode the velocity and current regulators are active.
The following types of velocity settings are supported in velocity mode:
... with stroke limitation When the stroke limit is reached, the device reacts in accordance
with parameterised STL monition monitoring
è 5.9 Stroke limit reached
·
1 TRV Target window reaches velocity
2 TRT Target window reaches torque –
·
4 FEV Velocity following error
6 TMX Position target area monitoring –
·
7 TMV Speed target area monitoring
8 TMT Torque target area monitoring –
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
13 HLN Hardware limit switch reached negative
·
14 SLP Software limit position reached positive
·
15 SLN Software limit position reached negative
·
16 STX Standstill monitoring position/velocity
·
17 STV Standstill monitoring velocity
·
18 LS Stop reached
·
19 STLP Stroke limit reached positive
·
20 STLN Stroke limit reached negative
·
21 VM Speed monitoring
22 PB Pushback monitoring –
·
23 RDX Remaining distance monitoring
·
24 MC Trajectory completed
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
·
28 ACC Drive accelerated
·
29 DEC Drive decelerated
30… 31 – Reserved –
Motion quantities
The path course of a positioning command is largely influenced by the following motion quantities:
v 0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
- 0.1
- 0.2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
a 0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
- 0.1
- 0.2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
1.0
j
0.5
0.0
- 0.5
- 1.0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Name Description
v Velocity
Name Description
a Acceleration
j Jerk
Tab. 262 Legend for timing graph of velocity mode
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword
(0x6041)
Target velocity
(0x60FF)
Max profile velocity
(0x607F) Limit
Minimum Function
Max. motor speed
comparator
(0x6080)
Polarity
(0x607E)
Objects
Bit1) Description
8
Bit1) Description
13 12 10
Target velocity reached (Target reached) (depending on Bit 8 (Halt) in Controlword 0x6040)
x x 0 Halt = 0: target velocity was not reached
x x 1 Halt = 0: target velocity was reached
x x 0 Halt = 1: drive decelerated
x x 1 Halt = 1: velocity = 0
Standstill message
x 0 x Geschwindigkeitsistwert ≠ 0
x 1 x Geschwindigkeitsistwert = 0
Velocity following error (Following error)
0 x x A velocity following error is not active
1 x x Velocity following error limit reached
1) signal status: 0 = low; 1 = high; x = any
Tab. 265 Monitoring Velocity Mode
4.1.4.3 PROFIdrive
Control and Monitoring
Application class è 12.4.3.2 Finite State Machine Velocity Mode in Application Class 1
PNUs
4.1.5.1 Function
In the force/torque mode profile position operating mode the theoretical setpoint curve is calculated
by the integrated trajectory generator (Profile torque mode). The trajectory for the target torque is cal-
culated based on the torque rise time. The force/torque mode enables force control. In force/torque
mode the velocity and current regulators are active.
The transition to the new setpoint quantity can be influenced by parameterisation of the rise time.
The following variants are supported in force/torque mode:
·
2 TRT Target window reaches torque
3 FEX Following error position –
·
8 TMT Torque target area monitoring
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
13 HLN Hardware limit switch reached negative
·
14 SLP Software limit position reached positive
·
15 SLN Software limit position reached negative
·
16 STX Standstill monitoring position/velocity
·
17 STV Standstill monitoring velocity
·
18 LS Stop reached
·
19 STLP Stroke limit reached positive
·
20 STLN Stroke limit reached negative
·
21 VM Speed monitoring
·
22 PB Pushback monitoring
·
23 RDX Remaining distance monitoring
·
24 MC Trajectory completed
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
30… 31 – Reserved –
Torque rise time Minimum time for reaching the target torque
Speed limit value Maximum velocity for reaching the target torque
Activation of stroke limits Stroke limit monitoring must be activated by parameters.
Negative stroke limit If the negative stroke limit is greater than or equal to the positive
Positive stroke limit stroke limit, the stroke limit is not effective.
0.5
M 0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
- 0.1
- 0.2
0 0. 2 0. 4 0. 6 0. 8 1
1.0
M/s 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
- 0.2
0 0. 2 0. 4 0. 6 0. 8 1
Name Description
M Torque
M/s Torque increase
Tab. 270 Legend for force/torque mode timing graph
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword
(0x6041)
Target torque
(0x6071)
Target slope
(0x6087)
Torque demand
Trajectory (0x6074)
generator
Controlword
(0x6040) Torque
control
Max torque
and Motor
(0x6072)
power
stage
Max. current
(0x6073)
Motor rated current
(0x6075)
Motor rated torque
(0x6076)
Objects
Bit1) Description
8
Bit1) Description
10
4.1.5.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs
4.1.6.1 Function
Cyclic synchronised positioning mode enables setpoint values to be pre-set for the device in a fixed
time grid using the drive profile (SYNC interval). The import of the setpoint values is synchronised with
the synchronisation signal of the higher-order controller. The synchronisation signal is generally
slower by a whole number than the cycle of the closed-loop controller. The synchronisation time is
generally set by the higher-order PLC (synchronisation time 1 … 20 ms, step 1 ms, è Px.1051). The
integrated fine interpolator therefore calculates intermediate support points and derivations from the
setpoint quantity for the closed-loop controller (interpolation).
Monitoring Functions
The monitoring functions marked with a dot are effective in this operating mode:
·
3 FEX Following error position
4 FEV Velocity following error –
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
21 VM Velocity monitoring
22 PB Pushback monitoring –
24 MC Trajectory completed –
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
30… 31 – Reserved –
The integrated interpolator distinguishes the following operating modes in CSP operation, which can
be selected with the parameter Px.11412:
CSP Straight CSP operation without external pilot control values; pilot
control values are generated by an internal algorithm
– Ipo algorithms 4nd order
CSP-V external velocity pilot control value
– Ipo algorithms 3nd order
CSP-T external torque pilot control value
– Ipo algorithms 3nd order
CSP-VT external velocity and torque pilot control values
– Ipo algorithms 2nd order
Tab. 277 Operating Modes of the Integrated Interpolator in CSP Operation
The interpolator has two sets of interpolator algorithm instances and can be switched between the
CSP, CSV and CST operating modes. When switching the required algorithm instances are generated
first and populated with input data. When the algorithms reach the initialised status, the regulation is
switched to the new operating mode.
The following graph shows an example of the input and output values for the interpolator in straight
CSP operation without external pilot control values.
Fieldbus Controller
Interpolator
x x
x x
Ipo algorithm v v
4. order
a
j a
j=0
M=0
I=0
Fieldbus Controller
Interpolator
x x
x x
v v
Ipo algorithm
2. order
M
a=0
v v
Ipo algorithm j=0
2. order
M M
Ipo algorithm I=0
2. order
Fig. 52 CSP operation with external velocity and torque pilot control (CSP-VT)
11412 Interpolation mode Selection of CSx mode for the position default. The setting is
CSP accepted when the interpolation mode is activated by the device
profile.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 278 Parameter
Diagnostic Messages
Torque offset
(0x60B2)
Velocity offset
(0x60B1)
Target position + +
(0x607A)
+ +
Position Velocity Torque Motor
control control control
Geber
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword
(0x6041)
Target position
(0x607A)
Position
Limit actual
Software position limit Function value
Multiplier (0x6064)
(0x607D)
Polarity
(0x607E) Following
error
Following error window actual
(0x6065) value
Following error time out (0x60F4)
(0x6066)
Torque offset
(0x60B2)
Torque
Motor rated torque Multiplier actual
(0x6076)
value
(0x6077)
Max torque
(0x6072)
Motor rated torque Multiplier
(0x6076)
NOTICE!
The position following error is only evaluated in the "operation enabled" status.
Bit1) Description
13 12
Drive follows the command value (Drive follows the command value)
x 0 Drive does not follow the command value for internal reasons (e. g. because a
safety function is active)
x 1 Drive in operation enabled status and follows the command value.
Position following error (Following error)
0 1 Position following error in tolerance range
1 1 Position following error limit reached
1) Signal status: 0 = low; 1 = high
Tab. 282 Monitoring cyclic synchronised positioning mode (CSP)
4.1.6.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs
4.1.7.1 Function
The cyclic synchronised velocity mode enables setpoint values to be pre-set for the device in a fixed
time grid using the drive profile (SYNC interval). The import of the setpoint values is synchronised with
the synchronisation signal of the higher-order controller. The synchronisation signal is generally
slower by a whole number than the cycle of the closed-loop controller. The synchronisation time is
generally set by the higher-order PLC (synchronisation time 1 … 20 ms, step 1 ms, è Px.1051). The
integrated fine interpolator therefore calculates intermediate support points and derivations from the
setpoint quantity for the closed-loop controller (interpolation).
Monitoring Functions
The monitoring functions marked with a dot are effective in this operating mode:
·
4 FEV Velocity following error
6 TMX Position target area monitoring –
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
13 HLN Hardware limit switch reached negative
·
14 SLP Software end position reached positive
·
15 SLN Software limit position reached negative
·
16 STX Standstill monitoring position/velocity
·
17 STV Standstill monitoring velocity
·
18 LS Stop reached
19 STLP Stroke limit reached positive –
·
21 VM Velocity monitoring
22 PB Pushback monitoring –
24 MC Trajectory completed –
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
30… 31 – Reserved –
CSV Straight CSV operation without external pilot control values; pilot control
values are generated by an internal algorithm.
– Ipo algorithms 4nd order
CSV-T external torque pilot control value
– Ipo algorithms 3nd order
Tab. 286 Operating Modes of the Integrated Interpolator in CSV Operation
The interpolator has two sets of interpolator algorithm instances and can be switched between the
CSP, CSV and CST operating modes. When switching the required algorithm instances are generated
first and populated with input data. When the algorithms reach the initialised status, the regulation is
switched to the new operating mode.
The following graphs show the input and output values for the interpolator in the CSV operating
modes.
Fieldbus Controller
Interpolator
v x=0
v
Ipo algorithm v v
4. order
a
j a
M=0
I=0
Fieldbus Controller
Interpolator
x=0
v v
v v
Ipo algorithm a
M 3. order
j
a
M M j=0
Ipo algorithm
3. order
M
I=0
Parameter
11413 Interpolation mode Selection of CSx mode for the velocity default. The setting is
CSV accepted when the interpolation mode is activated by the device
profile.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 287 Parameter
Diagnostic Messages
Torque offset
(0x60B2)
Target velocity +
(0x60FF)
+
Velocity Torque Motor
control control
Geber
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword Velocity
(0x6041) actual
value
Target velocity (0x606C)
(0x60FF)
Polarity Multiplier
(0x607E)
Torque offset
(0x60B2)
Torque
Motor rated torque Multiplier actual
(0x6076)
value
(0x6077)
Max torque
(0x6072)
Motor rated torque Multiplier
(0x6076)
Bit1) Description
12
Drive follows the command value (Drive follows the command value)
0 Drive does not follow the command value for internal reasons (e. g. because a safety
function is active)
1 Drive is in Operation enabled status and follows the command value.
1) Signal status: 0 = low; 1 = high
Tab. 291 Monitoring cyclic synchronised velocity mode
4.1.7.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs
4.1.8.1 Function
The cyclic synchronised force/torque mode enables command values to be pre-set for the device in a
fixed time grid using the drive profile (SYNC interval). The import of the command values is synchron-
ised with the synchronisation signal of the higher-order controller. The synchronisation signal is gen-
erally slower by a whole number than the cycle of the closed-loop controller. The synchronisation time
is generally set by the higher-order PLC (synchronisation time 1 … 20 ms, step 1 ms, è Px.1051). The
integrated fine interpolator therefore calculates intermediate support points and derivations from the
setpoint quantity for the closed-loop controller (interpolation).
Monitoring functions
The monitoring functions marked with a dot are effective in this operating mode:
·
4 FEV Velocity following error
6 TMX Position target area monitoring –
9…11 – Reserved –
·
12 HLP Hardware limit switch reached positive
·
13 HLN Hardware limit switch reached negative
·
14 SLP Software limit position reached positive
·
15 SLN Software limit position reached negative
·
16 STX Standstill monitoring position/velocity
·
17 STV Standstill monitoring velocity
·
18 LS Stop reached
19 STLP Stroke limit reached positive –
·
21 VM Speed monitoring
·
22 PB Pushback monitoring
23 RDX Remaining distance monitoring –
24 MC Trajectory completed –
·
25 REFS Reference switch activated
26 TUR Torque utilisation exceeded –
30… 31 – Reserved –
Setpoint force/setpoint torque The higher-order PLC supplies the setpoint force.
Tab. 294 Motion quantities
Triggering commands
– Fieldbus (direct mode)
Requirements
– Controller enable
Pilot control values
Pilot control values are generated by an internal algorithm.
The input and output values of the interpolator in the CST operating mode are shown in the following
graph.
Fieldbus Controller
Interpolator
M x=0
M
Ipo algorithm M v=0
4. order
a=0
j=0
I=0
Target torque
(0x6071) Torque Motor
control
Geber
Controlword
(0x6040)
Statusword
(0x6041)
Target torque
(0x6071)
Motor rated torque Multiplier
(0x6076) Torque
Drive actual
Max. motor speed control value
(0x6080) function (0x6077)
Polarity Multiplier
(0x607E)
Max torque
(0x6072)
Motor rated torque Multiplier
(0x6076)
Bit1) Description
12
4.1.8.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs
4.1.9.1 Function
Operating Readiness Status
The device can display its operating status via an output (ready). For this, the output must be con-
figured accordingly (Px.11203 or Px.11204
è Tab. 212 Configurable Output Signals at X1A.9 and X1A.10). To configure the output using the
plug-in, see è page "Digital I/O".
The configured output is active if the servo drive is ready for operation.
If there is an error, the configured output is inactive.
Switch-on Behaviour
After the device is switched on, it runs through the start-up phase. E.g. it runs the following items:
– The relevant EEPROM data are imported.
– The factory parameter set is loaded.
– The customer-specific parameter set is imported.
– The parameterised configuration is compared with the physical configuration (actual/setpoint
comparison).
– The software components are initialised (I/O mapping, monitoring, limitations etc.).
– If the power supply is correct, the intermediate circuit is loaded.
If the start-up phase has been completed without errors, the device switches to the "Ready" status or
the "Profile" status depending on the parameterisation
è Parameters and Diagnostic Messages, Parameter Px.10234.
The start-up phase may take several seconds, depending on the encoder used.
Switch-off Behaviour
When switching off the logic power supply the device detects that it has dropped below the defined
threshold value and reacts as follows:
– The output stage is switched off
– With multi-turn encoders the multi-turn position is saved in the EEPROM
– The operating hour counter is saved è 9.6.3 Operating hour counter.
– The outputs are moved to a defined safe status
– A corresponding message is generated
– The last messages are saved in the diagnostic memory
When switching off the power supply the device detects that it has dropped below the defined
threshold value and reacts as follows:
– A corresponding message is generated
– A stop is initiated with the parameterised category è 9.2 Classification of Diagnostic Events.
– If the logic power supply to the device is still on, the fast discharge of the intermediate circuit is
initiated.
– The pre-charge relay is opened and this disconnects the DC Link capacitor from the rectifier.
Controller Enable
Various options are available for requesting controller enable. Parameters can be defined for how the
request for controller enable is to be triggered. The selection influences the operating mode that will
be activated after the controller enable.
– If the request is to be sent via the device-specific plug-in or the device profile, the associated
interface must have the master control è 3.1.4 Master control.
– If commutation angle discovery is required, the commutation angle discovery is performed. Then
the relevant operating mode is activated è Tab. 300 Options for controller enable.
– If commutation angle discovery is not required, the relevant operating mode is activated immedi-
ately è Tab. 300 Options for controller enable.
Timing
power on
no error
v=0
Stop Cat. 1
RF EA
RF SPS
OP
BR+
t1 t2
brake
Fig. 62 Timing graph achieve ready status – enable logic: IO and fieldbus (example)
With a new enable signal via CTRL-EN the closed-loop controller is also not enabled with pending
enable via fieldbus. For controller enable high level must first be pending at the CTRL-EN input and
then the positive edge of the enable signal must follow via fieldbus.
no error No error –
Tab. 298 Legend for the Achieve Ready Status Timing Graph
Detailed information on automatic actuation of the holding brakes è 3.3.2 Brake Control.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10234 Controller enable Defines which operating mode is to be active after activation of
operating mode controller enable by CTRL-EN. The operating mode selected here
is only effective if the parameter Px.10232 has the value 1.
Possible operating modes
è Tab. 301 Possible Operating Modes with Controller Enable
via I/O.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10235 Target velocity for Specifies the target velocity with controller enable for velocity
controller enable operation. The target velocity selected here is only effective if
(velocity operation) the parameter Px.10232 has the value 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
10236 Target torque for con- Specifies the target torque with controller enable for torque
troller enable (torque operation. The target torque selected here is only effective if the
operation) parameter Px.10232 has the value 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
10237 Maximum velocity for Specifies the maximum velocity with controller enable for torque
controller enable operation. The maximum velocity selected here is only effective
(torque operation) if the parameter Px.10232 has the value 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
10238 Index for controller Specifies the index of the record that is to be started after con-
enable troller enable if the record selection operating mode is activated
with controller enable -> Px.10234.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
11280018 Torque increase for Specifies the torque increase that is to be used to achieve the
controller enable target torque after controller enable. The torque increase selec-
ted here is only effective if the parameter Px.10232 has the
value 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm/s
Tab. 299 Parameter
15 Start record table On issue of controller enable the record table is activ-
ated. The device reacts as follows:
– Stop category 2
è 9.2 Classification of Diagnostic Events.
– After elapse of the switch-on delay the paramet-
erised record is automatically run (Px.10238).
Tab. 301 Possible Operating Modes with Controller Enable via I/O
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
10231 0x218E.01 Device status UINT32
10232 0x218E.02 Controller enable selection UINT32
10234 0x218E.03 Controller enable operating mode UINT32
10235 0x218E.04 Target velocity for controller enable (velocity FLOAT32
operation)
10236 0x218E.05 Target torque for controller enable (torque FLOAT32
operation)
10237 0x218E.06 Maximum velocity for controller enable FLOAT32
(torque operation)
10238 0x218E.07 Index for controller enable SINT32
11280018 0x218E.08 Torque increase for controller enable FLOAT32
Tab. 302 Objects
4.1.9.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs
4.2 Stop
4.2.1 Function
The stop command aborts the current motion command. The subsequent reactions to the stop com-
mand depend on what triggered the stop.
The stop ramps are executed with the aid of the trajectory generator. If a stop is triggered, the current
motion command or the cyclic synchronised operation is aborted and a stop ramp with end velocity 0
is calculated (parameters for the stop ramp è Tab. 305 Parameter). The closed-loop controller is
switched to velocity control to execute the stop ramp.
With a stop via the record table or a category 2 stop:
– If the standstill monitor detects that the drive has stopped moving, the closed-loop controller
switches to position control and uses the actual position value as the new setpoint quantity.
Parameters and Diagnostic Messages
12101 Stop ramp decelera- Specifies the deceleration for stops that are triggered by the
tion device profile, the device-specific Plug-in or a category 1 and 2
diagnostic event.
Information on the parameterisation of the deceleration for dir-
ect stops via the device profile Ci402 è 4.2.2 CiA 402.
Information on the parameterisation of the deceleration for dir-
ect stops via the device profile è 4.2.3 PROFIdrive.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
12111 Stop ramp jerk Specifies the jerk for stops that are triggered by the following:
– Device profile (direct)
– Device-specific plug-in
– Category 1 or 2 diagnostic events.
Access Read/write
Update Effective immediately
Unit User-defined
Tab. 305 Parameter
4.2.3 PROFIdrive
PNUs for Stopping
4.3 Hold
4.3.1 Function
The reactions to the hold command depend on the active operating mode. If the cyclic synchronised
operation is active, the hold command is ignored. In other operating modes the current command is
aborted by the hold command and continued when the command is withdrawn.
Information on the operating modes è 4.1.2 Operating modes for performing motion commands.
The stop ramp for the hold command in a profile operating mode is determined by the parameters val-
id for the operating mode è 4.2 Stop.
4.3.3 PROFIdrive
Triggering and monitoring
Finite state machine application class 3 (STW1.5 Intermediate stop)
è 12.4.3.3 Finite State Machine Positioning Mode in Application Class 3.
4.4 Homing
4.4.1 Function
In order to be able to approach an absolute, unique position in the positioning range, the drive must
be homed to the dimensional reference system.
The homing of the drive includes:
– Homing
– Definition of the axis zero-point
– Definition of the dimension reference system è 3.2.5 Dimension Reference System
Reference mark
In the homing process the position of the reference mark is found in accordance with the selected
homing method. The reference mark is by default the absolute reference point for the dimensional ref-
erence system. A valid homing is required for all motion commands with the "position" target. Motion
commands with the "velocity, torque and jogging" targets cannot be run without a valid homing.
Referencing method
The "limit switch, reference switch, stop, zero pulse or current position" target can be selected for the
reference mark with the "homing method" parameter. The maximum positioning accuracy for the ref-
erence mark can be reached with the "zero pulse" method.
Check of referencing methods of the open-loop operation without encoder
Referencing methods with zero pulse and with stop detection are not available in the open-loop oper-
ation without encoder. Stop detection is only supported in closed-loop mode. A zero pulse cannot be
detected without an encoder. Therefore, only the following referencing methods are supported in
open-loop operation without encoder:
Referencing methods for open-loop operation:
– Method 17: negative limit switch
– Method 18: positive limit switch
– Method 23: Positive reference switch
– Method 27: Negative reference switch
– Method 37: Current position
Because stop monitoring is not possible during a homing movement, timeout monitoring is executed.
Referencing parameter
The "acceleration, velocity and jerk" setpoint values for "search, creeping jerk and travel" can be spe-
cified with the "homing parameter".
Homing
A homing is run with the start using the "limit switch, reference switch, stop and zero pulse" homing
methods. The motion phase that is run depends on the selected homing method. A motion with the
"current position" homing method is only run if the "travel to the axis zero-point" function is activ-
ated.
– Parameters:
– Search stroke:
The search path for the search is limited with the "maximum search stroke in positive/negat-
ive direction" parameters.
– Homing to the stop:
Travel to the axis zero-point is recommended for homing methods -17/-18 "homing to stop"
to prevent continuous control at the stop.
– Software end positions:
Monitoring the software end positions is activated after a valid homing.
– Encoder emulation:
Encoder emulation can be activated for the duration of homing with the "Do not activate
encoder emulation during homing" parameter.
Axis zero-point travel
Axis zero-point travel can be activated with the "travel to axis zero-point after homing" parameter. The
axis zero-point travel is run immediately after a valid homing if the axis zero-point offset ≠ 0.
– Parameters:
– Limit switches, stops and following errors:
The monitoring of limit switches, stops and following errors is activated for the duration of
axis zero-point travel.
Homing status
In the following cases the "homing status" changes:
– the status is reset
– At the start of a new homing
– Every time the device is restarted with single-turn encoder
– After replacement of the motor with multi-turn encoder
844 Search for reference Shows the setpoint acceleration of searching for the reference
mark setpoint acceler- mark.
ation Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
845 Search for reference Shows the setpoint jerk of searching for the reference mark.
mark setpoint jerk Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
846 Setpoint reference Shows the setpoint velocity of creeping of the reference mark.
mark creeping velo- Access read/write
city
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
847 Setpoint reference Shows the setpoint acceleration of creeping of the reference
mark creeping accel- mark.
eration Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
848 Setpoint reference Shows the setpoint jerk of creeping of the reference mark.
mark creeping jerk Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
849 Move to axis zero Shows the setpoint velocity of move to the axis zero point.
point setpoint velocity Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8410 Move to axis zero Shows the setpoint acceleration of the move to the axis zero
point setpoint accel- point.
eration Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8411 Search for move to Shows the setpoint jerk of searching for move to the axis zero
axis zero point set- point.
point jerk Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8412 Maximum search Shows the maximum search stroke in positive direction.
stroke in positive dir- Access read/write
ection
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8413 Maximum search Shows the maximum search stroke in negative direction.
stroke in negative dir- Access read/write
ection
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8417 Referencing method Shows the selected homing method for homing of the axis
(value = method).
– -27: negative stop/limit switch with travel to reference
switch
– -23: positive stop/limit switch with travel to reference
switch
– -18: positive stop
– -17: negative stop
– -2: positive stop with zero pulse
– -1: negative stop with zero pulse
– 1: negative HW limit switch with zero pulse
– 2: positive HW limit switch with zero pulse
– 7: positive reference switch with zero pulse
– 11: negative reference switch with zero pulse
– 17: negative HW limit switch
– 18: positive HW limit switch
– 23: positive reference switch
– 27: negative reference switch
– 33: current position with negative zero pulse
– 34: current position with positive zero pulse
– 37: current position (default setting)
Referencing methods with zero pulse detection and stop detec-
tion are not available because the closed-loop controller without
encoder cannot detect a zero pulse or stop.
8416 Axis zero point offset Specifies the offset of the axis zero point to the reference mark.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8421 Deactivate encoder Specifies the status of the encoder emulation during the hom-
emulation during ing.
homing 0: deactivated
1: activated
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 311 Homing parameters
4.4.2 Timing
Homing to reference switch or limit switch
The graph shows as an example homing to a reference or limit switch without zero pulse in a positive
search direction and then travel to the axis zero-point in negative direction.
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
i1 Maximum current
i2 Nominal current limit percentage
t1 Duration of search
t2 Duration of stop detection
t3 Duration of travel to the axis zero-point
t4 Setpoint value time monitoring window stop detection
v1 Target velocity search
v2 Target velocity travel
x1 Reference mark stop
x2 Axis zero point
x3 Axis zero point offset
x4 Stop
Start Start homing
Status Referencing status
Tab. 314 Legend for homing to stop
4.4.3.2 Method 33/34: current position with zero pulse in negative/positive direction
The reference mark is found by the first zero pulse of the encoder.
Sequence:
1. Search zero pulse: first zero pulse of the encoder is searched at creep velocity in the search direc-
tion.
2. Set reference mark: position of the zero pulse is taken as the reference mark.
3. Set axis zero-point: the axis zero-point is set with reference to the reference mark.
4. Report status: "homing status" is set.
Travel to the axis zero-point è 4.4.3.10 Travel to axis zero-point.
Method 34: positive search direction Method 33: negative search direction
Situation Reaction
Zero pulse within one motor revolution not detec- Homing aborted with fault message.
ted
Distance "zero pulse - limit switch" too short Homing aborted with fault message.
Limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 318 Different sequence scenarios
Method 18: positive search direction Method 17: negative search direction
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" limit switch not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
(rising edge)
Limit switch edge not detected (falling edge) Homing aborted with fault message.
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 320 Different sequence scenarios
Tab. 321 Sequence principle - homing to limit switch with zero pulse
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" limit switch not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
(rising edge)
Limit switch edge not detected (falling edge) Homing aborted with fault message.
Zero pulse within one motor revolution not detec- Homing aborted with fault message.
ted
Distance "zero pulse - limit switch" too short Homing aborted with fault message.
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 322 Different sequence scenarios
Method 23: positive search direction Method 27: negative search direction
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" reference switch not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
(rising edge)
Reference switch edge not detected (falling edge) Homing aborted with fault message.
"Search direction" limit switch detected Limit switch monitoring is deactivated
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 324 Different sequence scenarios
Tab. 325 Sequence principle - homing to reference switch with zero pulse
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" reference switch not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
(rising edge)
Reference switch edge not detected (falling edge) Homing aborted with fault message.
Zero pulse within one motor revolution not detec- Homing aborted with fault message.
ted
Distance "zero pulse - reference switch" too Homing aborted with fault message.
short
"Search direction" limit switch detected Limit switch monitoring is deactivated
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 326 Different sequence scenarios
4.4.3.7 Method -23/-27: positive/negative stop/limit switch with run to reference switch
The reference mark is found by the switching edge of the reference switch after identification of the
limit switch or the stop.
Sequence:
1. Search stop/limit switch: stop or rising edge of the limit switch is searched in search direction at
search velocity.
2. Search reference switch: reference switch is searched in opposite direction at search velocity.
3. Search reference switch edge: falling edge of the reference switch (rest position) is searched
again at creep velocity in the opposite direction.
4. Set reference mark: position of switching edge is taken as the reference mark.
5. Set axis zero-point: the axis zero-point is set with reference to the reference mark.
6. Report status: "homing status" is set.
Travel to the axis zero-point è 4.4.3.10 Travel to axis zero-point.
Method -23: positive search direction Method -27: negative search direction
Tab. 327 Sequence principle – reference movement to stop/limit switch positive/negative with travel
to reference switch
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" stop and limit switch not Homing aborted with fault message.
detected
Limit switch edge not detected (falling edge) Homing aborted with fault message.
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
"Search direction" reference switch detected Reference switch is ignored
"Opposite direction" stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 328 Different sequence scenarios
Method -18: positive search direction Method -17: negative search direction
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" stop not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
"Search direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 330 Different sequence scenarios
Method -2: positive search direction Method -1: negative search direction
Method -2: positive search direction Method -1: negative search direction
Situation Reaction
"Search direction" stop not detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Zero pulse within one motor revolution not detec- Homing aborted with fault message.
ted
"Search direction" limit switch detected Limit switch monitoring is deactivated
"Opposite direction" limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 332 Different sequence scenarios
Positive axis zero-point offset: positive travel Negative axis zero-point offset: negative travel
direction direction
Situation Reaction
Axis zero-point was not reached Homing aborted with fault message.
Limit switch detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Stop detected Homing aborted with fault message.
Tab. 334 Different sequence scenarios
8411 0x2172.0C Search for move to axis zero point setpoint FLOAT32
jerk
8412 0x2172.0D Maximum search stroke in positive direction SINT64
8413 0x2172.0E Maximum search stroke in negative direction SINT64
8414 0x2172.0F Nominal current limit value scaling factor FLOAT32
8415 0x2172.10 Limit position detection time monitoring win- FLOAT32
dow
8416 0x2172.11 Axis zero point offset SINT64
8417 0x2172.12 Referencing method SINT32
8418 0x2172.13 Status state machine homing UINT32
8421 0x2172.16 Deactivate encoder emulation during homing BOOL
Tab. 335 Objects
The overview shows the function of the homing mode:
All homing methods can only be performed in the "operation enabled" status.
Bit1) Description
8 4
Bit1) Description
15 13 12 10
4.4.5 PROFIdrive
PNUs for homing
4.5.1.1 Function
Command records can be saved in a record table in the device. The command records contain para-
meters for processing commands and can be addressed by a record number. To start a command
record, e. g. via the device profile, the controlling PLC only needs to send the record number and the
start signal in the output data. The record table can be activated either as a foreground process or a
background process. However, motion commands can only be run as a foreground process
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810).
... as foreground pro- All command record types can be executed, including motion commands.
cess The event table can monitor events at the same time.
... as background pro- Motion commands are illegal and generate a category 1 stop.
cess The event table can monitor events at the same time.
Tab. 339 Mode of record table
Besides the parameters for pure command processing, record selection offers the following options
for influencing sequence control:
Record switching A start condition can be established for every record. The start condition
specifies what the reaction should be to a start signal for the record if the
current command has not been ended yet (abort, wait, ignore, Px.1838).
Record sequencing Command sequences that can be started with a single start signal can be
defined by sequencing records of the record table
è 4.5.2 Record sequencing.
Event table Step enabling conditions that should be monitored in parallel can be
defined with the event table (è 4.5.3 Monitoring of events).
Tab. 340 Options for sequence control
Mode of record table
– possible as background or foreground process
– maximum 3 record sequences per command record
– depending on the product variant and firmware: up to 128 command records and up to 128 record
links in total
The command records of the record table can be started as follows:
– the device profile of the higher-order controller
– the engineering interface, e. g. via the plug-in
Rules for processing
– The "write parameters" command record is always processed in one cycle and contains the start
of the next command.
– The priority of the record sequences depends on the index of the data record in which the record
sequence was created. Record sequences in data records with a smaller index have priority over
record sequences in data records with a larger index. If conditions in multiple record sequences
return the value "true" simultaneously, the record sequence in the data record with the smaller
index is effective.
Timing
Start A B
t
MC
t
Fig. 70 Start condition “Interrupt” (example)
Name Description
1130224 Activation back- Specifies whether the record table is activated as a foreground
ground mode process or a background process.
è Tab. 339 Mode of record table
This means:
– 0: foreground process
– 1: background process
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1810 Command record type Specifies the type of the command record.
Px.1810.0.0: record type of data set 0
...
Px.1810.0.64: record type for data set 64
... (depending on the product variant and the firmware)
Permissible values
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1811 Record number Specifies the record number with which the command record is
to be addressed.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1812 Record table field 1 Specifies the value of the first parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1813 Record table field 2 Specifies the value of the second parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1815 Record table field 4 Specifies the value of the fourth parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1816 Record table field 5 Specifies the value of the fifth parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1817 Record table field 6 Specifies the value of the sixth parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1818 Record table field 7 Specifies the value of the seventh parameter depending on the
record type
è Tab. 343 Command record type parameter (ID Px.1810)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1838 Selection start condi- Specifies the behaviour on switching to another command
tion record record.
This means:
– 0: interrupt è Fig.70
The current command is interrupted immediately, and the
newly addressed command is executed directly.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1846 Status of record table Display the status of the current record.
– 0: Inactive
– 1: new
– 2: active
– 3: executed
– 5: buffered
– 6: cancelled
– 7: synchronised
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 342 Parameter
Parameters depending on the record type
The meaning of the record table field 1 … record table field 7 parameters depends on the selected
record type (value of the record type parameter).
Table type
P1.1810.0.0 5 Date record 0: positioning mode (5)
P1.1810.0.1 4 Date record 1: velocity mode (4)
Record number
P1.1811.0.0 0 Record number 0
P1.1811.0.1 1 Record number 1
4.5.2.1 Function
Sequencing multiple records of the record table enables specification of command sequences. A com-
mand sequence is executed after starting with no further start commands to the last record of the
sequence. If the record list is activated as a foreground process, complex motion sequences and travel
profiles can be created with command sequences, e. g.:
1831 Record step enabling Specifies the enabling condition that is to be monitored along
type with the execution of the record.
Possible record enabling types
è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1832 Record sequencing Specifies the number of the record from which the record
record number start sequence starts (maximum 3 record sequence per record).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1833 Record sequencing Specifies the number of the target record to which the record
record number target sequence is targeted (maximum 1 target record per record
sequence).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1834 Record sequencing Specifies the value of the time parameter
field time è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
1835 Record sequencing Specifies the value of the first comparator type-dependent para-
field 1 meter
è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831)
Access read/write
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1837 Current record table Shows the current record number.
index Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 345 Parameter
The record enabling depends on the configured monitoring windows with a comparator that depends
on a motion monitor.
Example
Record 1 should be sequenced with record 2 and record 3.
It should be switched to record 2 if the actual position is within a pre-set window for the duration of
the specified damping time.
It should be switched to record 3 if the "record table 0" high level is pending at the digital input.
4.5.3.1 Function
The event table enables the monitoring of events that are to be monitored parallel to the step enabling
conditions of the current command record. If the event occurs, the current command record of the
record table is interrupted and branched to the record of the record table that was defined in the event
table. Characteristics of the event table:
– max. 16 events
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1842 Next event target Specifies the number of the target record to which the step
enabling condition is targeted (maximum 1 target record per
event).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1843 Next event field time Specifies the value of the "time" parameter
è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
1844 Next event field 1 Specifies the value for the first comparator type-dependent
parameter
è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1845 Next event field 2 Specifies the value for the second comparator type-dependent
parameter
è Record step enabling type parameter (ID Px.1831)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 348 Parameter
Diagnostic messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1130224 0x2159.0A Activation background mode BOOL
1810 0x2230.01 ... 80 Command record type UINT32
1811 0x2231.01 ... 80 Record number SINT32
1812 0x2232.01 ... 80 Record table field 1 SINT64
1813 0x2233.01 ... 80 Record table field 2 SINT64
1814 0x2234.01 ... 80 Record table field 3 SINT64
1815 0x2235.01 ... 80 Record table field 4 SINT64
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1831 0x2239.01 ... 80 Record step enabling type UINT32
1832 0x223A.01 ... 80 Record sequencing record number start SINT32
1833 0x223B.01 ... 80 Record sequencing record number target SINT32
1834 0x223C.01 ... 80 Record sequencing field time FLOAT32
1835 0x223D.01 ... 80 Record sequencing field 1 SINT64
1836 0x223E.01 ... 80 Record sequencing field 2 SINT64
1837 0x2159.01 Current record table index SINT32
Tab. 351 Objects
Objects command record event table
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1840 0x2159.03 Activate Event table BOOL
1841 0x2240.01 ... 10 Event type UINT32
1842 0x2241.01 ... 10 Next event target SINT32
1843 0x2242.01 ... 10 Next event field time FLOAT32
1844 0x2243.01 ... 10 Next event field 1 SINT64
1845 0x2244.01 ... 10 Next event field 2 SINT64
Tab. 352 Objects
4.5.5 PROFIdrive
PNUs of command record table
– asymmetrical dynamic value record, different dynamic values for jogging 1 (positive direction) and
jogging 2 (negative direction)
– incremental (relative positioning at specific distance – for PROFIdrive AC3 only)
Jogging in the plug-in supports jogging in 2 phases and with symmetrical or asymmetrical dynamic
value records. Incremental jogging is not supported here.
Timing
The jogging motion consists of the following motion phases for jogging in 2 phases:
– Phase 1: motion at a slower velocity for precise positioning motions. (dynamic parameter record
"slow")
– Phase 2: motion at a faster velocity for fast traversing through longer distances. (dynamic para-
meter record "fast")
– Phase 3: motion is stopped.
v2
v1
t
t1
Jog
t
STV
t
Fig. 71 Jog mode timing graph (example)
1510 Jog duration 1 move- Duration of phase 1 from detection of the command to jogging
ment to switchover to phase 2. After elapse of the period the drive
accelerates in phase 2 to the velocity for faster movement.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
1511 Slow jog 1 velocity Maximum velocity during phase 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1512 Slow jog 1 accelera- Acceleration (and deceleration) during phase 1.
tion Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1513 Slow jog 1 jerk Jerk during phase 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
214539 Jog duration 2 move- Duration of phase 1 from detection of the command to jogging
ment to switchover to phase 2. After elapse of the period the drive
accelerates in phase 2 to the velocity for faster movement.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
214540 Fast jog 2 velocity Maximum velocity during phase 2.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
214541 Fast jog 2 acceleration Acceleration (and deceleration) during phase 2.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
214542 Fast jog 2 jerk Jerk during phase 2.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
526917 Jogging state Reports the status of the drive in jog mode.
Value list:
– 0: Jogging 1 with 2 movement phases
– 1: Jogging 2 with 2 movement phases
– 2: Stop jogging
– 3: Jogging 1 fast
– 4: Jogging 2 fast
– 5: Jogging 1 slow
– 6: Jogging 2 slow
– 7: Incremental jog 1
– 8: Incremental jog 2
– 9: Velocity halt jog 1
– 10: Velocity halt jog 2
– 11: Velocity jog 1
– 12: Velocity jog 2
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1510 0x2186.01 Jog duration 1 movement FLOAT32
1511 0x2186.02 Slow jog 1 velocity FLOAT32
1512 0x2186.03 Slow jog 1 acceleration FLOAT32
1513 0x2186.04 Slow jog 1 jerk FLOAT32
1514 0x2186.05 Fast jog 1 velocity FLOAT32
1515 0x2186.06 Fast jog 1 acceleration FLOAT32
1516 0x2186.07 Fast jog 1 jerk FLOAT32
526917 0x2186.08 Jogging state UINT32
214526 0x2186.09 Activation of symmetrical jog BOOL
214535 0x2186.12 Slow jog 2 velocity FLOAT32
214536 0x2186.13 Slow jog 2 acceleration FLOAT32
214537 0x2186.14 Slow jog 2 jerk FLOAT32
214539 0x2186.16 Jog duration 2 movement FLOAT32
214540 0x2186.17 Fast jog 2 velocity FLOAT32
214541 0x2186.18 Fast jog 2 acceleration FLOAT32
214542 0x2186.19 Fast jog 2 jerk FLOAT32
Tab. 361 Objects
Control and monitoring
Basic functions for jogging è 4.6.1 Function.
Requirements
– Controller enable (status Operation enabled)
– Jog mode is activated: object 0x6060 Modes of operation CiA402 = –3.
Feedback: object 0x6061 Modes of operation display CiA402 = –3.
Control
The object 0x6040 Control word CiA402 has the following specific bits in jog operating mode:
Monitoring
The object 0x6041 Status word CiA402 has the following specific bits in jog operating mode:
4.6.3 PROFIdrive
The jogging function has the following special features from PROFIdrive:
– Only jogging with a motion phase is supported.
– Jogging of a parameterised distance (can be switched with POS_STW2.5 incremental jogging;
applicable only for AC3 with additional parameters).
Additional Parameters and Diagnostic Messages
PNUs of Jog Mode
Requirements
Requirements in application class AC1: the drive is in the status S61 RFG inactive è Fig.130.
Requirements in application class AC3: the drive is in the status S41 Basic State Positioning Mode or
S453 Intermediate Stop è Fig.131
5 Motion monitoring
5.1 Motion monitoring functions
The motion monitoring functions monitor the drive system and protect the drive components against
damage. Each motion monitoring function reads out values from the servo drive and compares them
to the expected behaviour (e.g. threshold value).
The actual values from the actual value management, the setpoint values (determined from between
the pilot control and directional lock), as well as the target values and configuration of the actual com-
mand are imported to monitor the motion.
All of the motion monitoring functions are executed in parallel during this process. Which of the func-
tions will cause an error response is dependent on the operating mode.
Name Description
Overview
TRV Speed
TRT Torque
FE Following error è 5.3 Following error
FEX Item
FEV Speed
TM Target area monitoring è 5.4Target area
TMX Item monitoring
TMV Speed
TMT Torque
HL Hardware limit switch reached è 5.5 Hardware limit
HLP positive switch reached
HLN negative
SL Software limit position reached è 5.6 Software limit
SLP positive position reached
SLN negative
ST Standstill monitoring è 5.7 Standstill monitoring
STX Position/speed
STV Speed
LS Stop reached è 5.8 Stop reached
STL Stroke limit reached è 5.9 Stroke limit reached
STLP positive
STLN negative
VM Speed monitoring è 5.10 Speed monitoring
(spinning protection)
PB Pushback monitoring è 5.11Pushback
monitoring
RDX Remaining distance monitoring è 5.12 Remaining
distance monitoring
Configuration word
Diagnostic messages (e.g. following error) that are not required in certain operating situations can be
disabled via the configuration word. The configuration word is a bitmask. If the bit for the associated
motion monitoring function is set (1), the associated motion monitoring function may issue a dia-
gnostic message and activate limits (e.g. directional lock). Without a diagnostic message, the bit is of
no significance to the motion monitoring functions. The configuration word is specified by the Motion
Sequence Control (MSC) component depending on the motion command and parameterisation of the
positioning block and is transmitted as part of the command.
Message types
Status signals Signal relating to an event or state to advance the internal state machine.
Diagnostic messages Signal relating to a malfunction or error, in part with parameterisable error
responses.
– Ignore
– Information copies
– Warning
– Stop category 0
– Stop category 1
– Stop category 2
Tab. 373 Message types
x/v /T
Act
2X Window
Target
t1
TRX
Start
t
Name Description
468 Damping time target Specifies the damping time for the target position, speed and
reached torque. The signal is set if the actual value for the specified dur-
ation is in the monitoring window. The signal remains set if the
actual value moves outside the monitoring window during the
specified duration. The damping time is re-evaluated when the
value returns to the window.
Access read/write
5.2.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of Target Window Reached
462 Damping time posi- Specifies the damping time for the position following error. The
tion: following error signal is set if the position difference for the specified duration
is outside the monitoring window. If the position difference is
within the monitoring window, the required damping time re-
starts when the difference is outside the window again.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
463 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for the position following error.
position: following The monitoring window is set symmetrically to the setpoint
error value pattern (window width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
464 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for the speed following error.
speed: following error The monitoring window is set symmetrically to the setpoint
value pattern (window width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4682 Current position: fol- Specifies the current position following error.
lowing error Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4683 Current velocity: fol- Specifies the current speed following error.
lowing error Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4690 Damping time velo- Specifies the damping time for the speed following error. The
city: following error signal is set if the speed difference for the specified duration is
outside the monitoring window. If the speed difference is within
the monitoring window, the required damping time re-starts
when the difference is outside the window again.
x/v
Set
Act
2xWindow
t1
FEx
t
Fig. 74 Timing diagram: following error
Name Description
5.3.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of following error
Initial state =0
x/v /T
Act
2XWindow
TargetSet
TRx
t1
TMX
Start
t
Name Description
Name Description
4665 Damping time target Specifies the damping time for target area monitoring (move-
range ment to a fixed stop). Minimum duration that the threshold
value can be exceeded before a message is generated. The
damping time is restarted if the actual value is below the
threshold value or if the prefix for the specified setpoint value
changes during the evaluation of the damping time.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
4666 Monitoring window Determines the monitoring window for the target position. The
position monitoring window is set symmetrically to the target variable
(window width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4667 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for the target speed. The mon-
velocity itoring window is set symmetrically to the target value (window
width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4668 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for the target torque. The mon-
torque itoring window is set symmetrically to the target value (window
width = 2x parameter).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
Tab. 388 Parameters - Target area monitoring
07 | 02 | 00129 Out of target range Drive has left the target range
(117571713)
Tab. 389 Diagnostic messages - Target area monitoring
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
4665 0x2166.35 Damping time target range FLOAT32
4666 0x2166.36 Monitoring window position FLOAT32
4667 0x2166.37 Monitoring window velocity FLOAT32
4668 0x2166.38 Monitoring window torque FLOAT32
Tab. 390 Objects
5.4.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of target area monitoring
101100 Configure negative Specifies the configuration of the negative hardware limit
hardware limit switch switch: 0: deactivated, 1: normally open, 2: normally closed
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
101101 Configure positive Specifies the configuration of the positive hardware limit switch:
hardware limit switch 0: deactivated, 1: normally open, 2: normally closed
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
101112 Negative hardware Specifies whether the negative hardware limit switch is active.
limit switch detected Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
101113 Positive hardware lim- Specifies whether the positive hardware limit switch is active.
it switch detected Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
101114 Negative limit switch Specifies the position where the negative limit switch was detec-
position detected ted.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
101115 Positive limit switch Specifies the position where the positive limit switch was detec-
position detected ted.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 393 Parameters - Hardware limit switch reached
07 | 01 | 00114 Negative hardware limit switch Negative hardware limit switch reached
(117506162) reached
07 | 01 | 00115 Positive hardware limit switch Positive hardware limit switch reached
(117506163) reached
07 | 01 | 00116 Limitation by negative hardware Limitation of direction of movement owing to
(117506164) limit switch negative hardware limit switch
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
101100 0x2189.01 Configure negative hardware limit switch UINT32
101101 0x2189.02 Configure positive hardware limit switch UINT32
101112 0x2189.0D Negative hardware limit switch detected BOOL
101113 0x2189.0E Positive hardware limit switch detected BOOL
101114 0x2189.0F Negative limit switch position detected SINT64
101115 0x2189.10 Positive limit switch position detected SINT64
Tab. 395 Objects
5.5.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of hardware limit switch reached
The software limit positions relate to the axis zero point. A valid reference run must therefore be com-
pleted. The reference run can also be completed if the drive is outside the limit positions.
Application
– Protect the drive against damage:
Status SLP or SLN is set when the limit position is exceeded. The status is reset as soon as the
drive reaches the valid range again.
– Protect the drive against damage:
– Limit position monitoring without automatic braking:
An error message is triggered if the limit position is reached or exceeded. The drive is stopped
depending on the set error response. The current direction of movement is blocked. Another
command in the blocked direction will not be executed. The block is removed when the drive
reaches the valid area again.
– Limit position monitoring with automatic braking:
Due to the current distance and speed, exceeding the limit position can be prevented by brak-
ing in time in record, interpolation and jog mode. The dynamic acceleration and jerk values
from the stop ramp parameters are used for the projection.
A message is triggered, and the parameterised error response is initiated, so that a standstill
can be achieved before the limit position, if possible. The current direction of movement is
blocked. Another command in the blocked direction will not be executed. The block is
removed when the drive reaches the valid area again.
Timing
Name Description
4628 Software limit posi- Specifies whether software limit position monitoring should be
tions active activated.
0: inactive
1: active
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4629 Negative software Specifies the limit value of the negative software limit position.
limit position The value of the negative software limit position must be lower
than the value of the positive software limit position.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4630 Positive software limit Specifies the limit value of the positive software limit position.
position The value of the positive software limit position must be greater
than the value of the negative software limit position.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4631 Activation of automat- Specifies whether the automatic stop ramp should be activated
ic stop ramp software before exceeding the software limit position. (Automatic) brak-
limit position ing is initiated as part of the error response. Braking is not initi-
ated if no error response is parameterised (warning).
0: inactive
1: active
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 399 Parameters - Software limit position reached
07 | 01 | 00109 Negative software limit position Negative software limit position reached
(117506157)
07 | 01 | 00110 Positive software limit position Positive software limit position reached
(117506158)
07 | 01 | 00111 Limitation negative direction Limitation of direction of movement owing to
(117506159) negative software limit position
07 | 01 | 00112 Limitation positive direction Limitation of direction of movement owing to
(117506160) positive software limit position
07 | 01 | 00113 Parameterisation of software limit Parameterisation of software limit positions
(117506161) positions invalid
Tab. 400 Diagnostic messages - Software limit position reached
5.6.2 PROFIdrive
PNUs of software limit position reached
Act
Abs(Act)
Lim
t
t1
STV
t
Fig. 77 Timing diagram: standstill monitoring
Name Description
465 Standstill damping Specifies the damping time of standstill monitoring. If the actual
time speed value falls below the threshold value and if it exceeds the
threshold during the damping time, the damping time is re-star-
ted once it falls below the threshold again.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
465 0x2166.06 Standstill damping time FLOAT32
466 0x2166.07 Monitoring window speed standstill monitor- FLOAT32
ing
467 0x2166.08 Monitoring window position standstill FLOAT32
Tab. 407 Objects
5.7.2 PROFIdrive
Standstill monitoring PNUs
Status signal LS
Stop detection
Initial state LS =0
The LS signal is set under the following conditions: 0à 1
– The actual current value exceeds the threshold value
– AND STV = 1
– AND both conditions are set to be longer than the damping time.
The LS signal is reset under the following conditions: 1à 0
– The actual current value falls below the threshold value.
– OR STV = 0
Tab. 409 Status signals - Stop reached
Abs(Act1)
Lim1
t
I Abs(Act2)
Lim2
t1
LS
t
Name Description
4626 Stop detection limit Specifies the percentage threshold value for the current limit.
value The value is relative to the current parameterisation of the nom-
inal current.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4627 Damping time limit Specifies the response delay when both conditions are met. If
detection the current threshold is parameterised at more than 100%, the
damping time must be set to lower than I²t for the standstill
(typically 50…200ms) to ensure that the detection is triggered.
The damping time starts when both limit value monitors are val-
id. The damping time is reset if just one of the limit value monit-
ors is invalid.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 411 Parameters - Stop reached
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
4626 0x2166.1B Stop detection limit value FLOAT32
4627 0x2166.1C Damping time limit detection FLOAT32
Tab. 412 Objects
5.8.2 PROFIdrive
Stop reached PNUs
10368 Default value negat- Specifies the negative stroke limit. The negative stroke limit
ive stroke limit must be lower than the positive stroke limit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
10369 Default value positive Specifies the positive stroke limit. The positive stroke limit must
stroke limit be greater than the negative stroke limit.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4675 Activation of automat- Specifies whether automatic braking should be activated. If
ic stop ramp stroke automatic braking is active, the drive is decelerated so that it
limit stops before the stroke limit, if possible. If automatic braking is
deactivated, the drive is only stopped once it reaches the stroke
limit.
0: inactive
1: active
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 415 Parameters - Stroke limit reached
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
10368 0x2190.08 Default value negative stroke limit SINT64
10369 0x2190.09 Default value positive stroke limit SINT64
4675 0x2166.3D Activation of automatic stop ramp stroke limit BOOL
Tab. 417 Objects
5.9.2 PROFIdrive
Stroke limit reached PNUs
Status signal VM
Initial state VM =0
The signal is set under the following conditions: 0à1
– The threshold value (speed) is reached
The signal is reset under the following conditions: 1à0
– The value falls below the threshold value (speed)
Tab. 419 Status signals - Speed monitoring
4660 Maximum speed Specifies the absolute value of the maximum speed. When the
threshold value is reached, the drive is stopped with stop cat-
egory 0. A diagnostic message is issued if the parameterised
speed value is exceeded.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 420 Parameters - Speed monitoring
07 | 02 | 00128 Velocity too high RPM monitoring reports velocity too high
(117571712)
Tab. 421 Diagnostic messages - Speed monitoring
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
4660 0x2166.30 Maximum speed FLOAT32
Tab. 422 Objects
5.10.2 PROFIdrive
Velocity monitoring PNUs
Timing
Status signal PB
Initial state =0
The signal is set under the following conditions: 0à1
Torque setpoint ≄ 0:
– The actual speed value exceeds the threshold value for longer than the damp-
ing time
– AND the drive moves in the opposite direction to the torque.
Torque setpoint = 0:
– The actual speed value exceeds the threshold value for longer than the damp-
ing time.
The signal is reset under the following conditions: 1à0
– The setting logic is inverted.
Tab. 424 Status signals - Pushback monitoring
Parameters and diagnostic messages
4663 Monitoring window Specifies the monitoring window for pushback monitoring.
pushback Threshold value for monitoring the actual speed (direction of
movement) in relation to the effective direction of the torque
(setpoint value).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4664 Damping time push- Specifies the damping time for pushback monitoring. Minimum
back duration that the threshold value can be exceeded before a mes-
sage is generated. The damping time is restarted if the actual
velocity is below the threshold value or if the prefix for the spe-
cified setpoint value (torque) changes during the evaluation of
the damping time.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 425 Parameters - Pushback monitoring
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
4663 0x2166.33 Monitoring window pushback FLOAT32
4664 0x2166.34 Damping time pushback FLOAT32
Tab. 427 Objects
5.11.2 PROFIdrive
Pushback monitoring PNUs
Initial state =0
The RD signal is set under the following condition: 0à 1
– The difference (command target value / current actual value) falls below the
limit value.
The RD signal is reset under the following condition: 1à 0
– The setting logic is inverted.
Tab. 429 Status signals - Remaining distance monitoring
4685 Limit value remaining Specifies the limit value of the remaining distance to be mon-
distance monitoring itored.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 430 Parameters - Remaining distance monitoring
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
4685 0x2166.69 Limit value remaining distance monitoring SINT64
Tab. 432 Objects
5.12.2 PROFIdrive
Remaining distance monitoring PNUs
Timing
Status signal MC
Initial state =0
The signal is set under the following conditions: 0à 1
– The trajectory is completed.
The signal is reset under the following conditions: 1à 0
– A new command is started.
Tab. 434 Status signals - Trajectory completed
Parameters and diagnostic messages
Initial state =0
The signal is set under the following conditions: 0à 1
– The configuration of the reference switch is not equal to 0
– AND the status of the reference switch is active.
The signal is reset under the following conditions: 1à 0
– The configuration of the reference switch = 0
– OR the status of the reference switch is inactive.
Tab. 436 Status signals - Reference switch
101200 Reference switch con- Determines the configuration of the reference switch.
figuration 0: Deactivated
1: N/O contact
2: N/C contact
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
101201 Reference switch Specifies whether the reference switch is active.
status 0: inactive
1: active
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 437 Parameters - Reference switch
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
101200 0x218A.01 Reference switch configuration UINT32
101201 0x218A.02 Reference switch status BOOL
Tab. 438 Objects
5.14.3 PROFIdrive
Reference switch PNUs
The actual position value has Movement in the corresponding direction is automatically
reached or exceeded the para- blocked. The closed-loop controller only allows movements in the
meterised software end posi- opposite direction.
tion. The directional lock remains active until the actual position value
A hardware limit switch has is in the valid range again or the directional lock is deactivated via
been triggered. parameter Px.10351.
10351 Request directional A directional lock can be triggered via this parameter.
lock Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10352 Active directional lock Indicates whether a directional lock has been requested by
parameter Px.10351 or the motion monitoring function (soft-
ware limit position or hardware limit switch reached).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
10353 Status directional lock Indicates whether the directional lock requested in Px.10352 is
active. The values of parameters Px.10352 and Px.10353 are
almost always identical. Exception: If, for example, an error stop
ramp is completed in the blocked area, Px.10352 displays the
request for a directional lock. Only once the stop ramp has been
completed and the drive is at a standstill will Px.10353 indicate
that the directional lock is active.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
10351 0x218F.01 Request directional lock SINT32
10352 0x218F.02 Active directional lock SINT32
10353 0x218F.03 Status directional lock SINT32
Tab. 443 Objects
5.15.3 PROFIdrive
Directional lock PNUs
6 Control
6.1 Cascade Controller
6.1.1 Function
The movement of the drive systems is controlled via the cascade controller. The basic structure of the
cascade controller consists of a position controller, a velocity controller and a current regulator. The
active control loop of the cascade control depends on the selected operating mode. The respective
input variables of the individual control loops are controlled to the set values. The actual values are
created out of the data of the transducer and the measured current. A better control behaviour can be
obtained via a pilot control. Also, limitations for the current and velocity controller can be activated.
Aside from the active control parameter set, 3 additional control parameter sets are available for the
parameterisation of the cascade controller.
220 Position controller Specifies the amplification gain for the P-element in the position
amplification gain controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
221 Dead zone position Specifies the value (relative to the zero point) of the dead zone
controller in the position controller. If the control deviation value is in the
range of the dead zone, the value "0" is output on the output of
the element.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
222 Minimum correction Specifies the limit value "Minimum correction velocity" for the
velocity velocity limitation on the output of the P-element in the position
controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
223 Maximum correction Specifies the limit value "Maximum correction velocity" for the
velocity velocity limitation on the output of the P-element in the position
controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
2216 Setpoint value velo- Specifies the setpoint velocity for the velocity controller at the
city controller output of the position controller including the feed forward con-
trol value for the velocity.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
2217 Position control error Specifies the control difference of input variables "Feed forward
control output position" and "Actual position" on the output of
the setpoint-actual comparator in the position controller.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
6100 Resulting lower limit Specifies the limit value "Lower limit value of velocity" for velo-
value velocity (closed city limiting.
loop controller) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
6101 Resulting upper limit Specifies the limit value "Upper limit value of velocity" for velo-
value velocity (closed city limiting.
loop controller) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
52675 Velocity limiting act- Specifies the monitoring status of "Velocity limiting is active"
ive for the setpoint value for the velocity controller in the position
controller.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
526794 Filter time constant Specifies the filter time constant for reaching a limit in the velo-
controller limitation city or current control circuit
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 447 Parameter
07 | 03 | 00135 Limit for velocity or current active A limit for the velocity or current is active
(117637255)
Tab. 448 Diagnostic Messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
220 0x215B.01 Position controller amplification gain FLOAT32
221 0x215B.02 Dead zone position controller SINT64
222 0x215B.03 Minimum correction velocity FLOAT32
223 0x215B.04 Maximum correction velocity FLOAT32
2216 0x215B.08 Setpoint value velocity controller FLOAT32
2217 0x215B.09 Position control error SINT64
6100 0x2168.08 Resulting lower limit value velocity (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
6101 0x2168.09 Resulting upper limit value velocity (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
52675 0x2152.09 Velocity limiting active BOOL
526794 0x2152.0D Filter time constant controller limitation FLOAT32
Tab. 449 Objects
6.1.2.2 PROFIdrive
Position controller PNUs
Tab. 451 Legend for the Block Diagram of the Velocity Controller
Recommendation: Before changing controller parameters, check the signal of the encoder. If required,
optimise signal noises using a suitable filter time constant.
224 Velocity controller Specifies the amplification gain for the PI-element in the velocity
amplification gain controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
225 Velocity controller Specifies the integration constant for the PI-element in the velo-
integration constant city controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1210 Actual velocity value Specifies the velocity measured by the primary encoder.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
2215 Velocity control error Specifies the control difference of input variables "Velocity con-
troller setpoint value" and "Actual value of velocity transducer
interface 1" on the output of the setpoint-actual comparator in
the velocity controller.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
2216 Setpoint value velo- Specifies the setpoint velocity for the velocity controller at the
city controller output of the position controller including the feed forward con-
trol value for the velocity.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
2218 Minimum torque Specifies the minimum torque for torque limitation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
2219 Maximum torque Specifies the maximum torque for torque limitation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
2220 Setpoint value torque Specifies the torque setpoint for the current regulator in the
velocity controller.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
52676 Current limitation act- Specifies the monitoring status of "Current limiting is active" for
ive the setpoint value of the active current in the velocity controller.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
526796 Maximum torque sym- Specifies the limit value "maximum torque" for the symmetrical
metrical torque limitation at the output of the velocity controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
Tab. 452 Parameter
06 | 02 | 00086 Sign limits The target torque and the velocity limit are
(100794454) uncorrelated.
Tab. 453 Diagnostic Messages
6.1.3.2 PROFIdrive
Velocity controller PNUs
Tab. 456 Legend for the Block Diagram of the Current Regulator
Parameters and Diagnostic Messages
39 Actual phase U cur- Specifies the actual value of the phase U current.
rent value Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit A
80 Amplification gain Specifies the amplification gain for the P-element in the reactive
current regulator current regulator.
(reactive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
81 Integration constant Specifies the integration constant for the I-element in the react-
current regulator ive current regulator.
(reactive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
82 Amplification gain Specifies the amplification gain for the P-element in the effective
current regulator (act- current regulator.
ive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
83 Integration constant Specifies the integration constant for the I-element in the effect-
current regulator (act- ive current regulator.
ive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
84 Setpoint value Specifies the setpoint voltage Ud at the output of the reactive
voltage Ud current regulator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
85 Setpoint value Specifies the setpoint voltage Uq at the output of the active cur-
voltage Uq rent regulator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
86 Setpoint value active Specifies the active current setpoint for the current regulator.
current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
87 Setpoint value react- Specifies the reactive current setpoint for the current regulator.
ive current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
88 Maximum output Specifies the limit value "Maximum output voltage" for the out-
voltage puts of the PI-elements (reactive current/active current) in the
current regulator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit V
310 Actual phase V cur- Specifies the actual value of the phase V current.
rent value Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit A
813 Actual reactive cur- Specifies the actual reactive current at the output of the current
rent value transformation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
814 Actual active current Specifies the actual active current at the output of the current
value transformation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
819 Control parameter Activate equalisation of the control parameters of the current
equalisation for active regulator for active current and reactive current
and reactive current – 0: inactive; for the calculation of the controller parameters,
regulators the plug-in only calculates the active current regulator. The
reactive current regulator remains unaffected.
– 1: active; for the calculation of the controller parameters,
the plug-in synchronises the parameters for the active cur-
rent and the reactive current
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
824 Reactive current con- Specifies the control difference of input variables "Reactive cur-
trol error rent setpoint value" and "Actual value of reactive current" on
the output of the setpoint-actual comparator in the current regu-
lator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
825 Active current control Specifies the control difference of input variables "Active cur-
error rent setpoint value" and "Actual value of active current" on the
output of the setpoint-actual comparator in the current regulat-
or.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
1206 Length motor cable Determines the length of the motor cable. The length of the
motor cable is required for controller sizing.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit mCable
1208 Cable cross section Defines the cable cross-section in mm². The cable cross-section
is required for controller sizing.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit mm²
52679 Voltage limiting filter Specifies the filter time constant for reaching the voltage limit.
time constant Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
52680 Voltage limiting Ud Specifies the monitoring status of "Voltage limiting Ud active"
active for the voltage Ud setpoint value in the current regulator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
52681 Voltage limiting Uq Specifies the monitoring status of "Voltage limiting Uq active"
active for the voltage Uq setpoint value in the current regulator.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 457 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
39 0x2151.0A Actual phase U current value FLOAT32
80 0x2153.01 Amplification gain current regulator (reactive FLOAT32
current)
81 0x2153.02 Integration constant current regulator (react- FLOAT32
ive current)
82 0x2153.03 Amplification gain current regulator (active FLOAT32
current)
83 0x2153.04 Integration constant current regulator (active FLOAT32
current)
84 0x2153.05 Setpoint value voltage Ud FLOAT32
85 0x2153.06 Setpoint value voltage Uq FLOAT32
86 0x2153.07 Setpoint value active current FLOAT32
87 0x2153.08 Setpoint value reactive current FLOAT32
88 0x2153.09 Maximum output voltage FLOAT32
310 0x2151.0B Actual phase V current value FLOAT32
813 0x2153.0E Actual reactive current value FLOAT32
814 0x2153.0F Actual active current value FLOAT32
819 0x2153.14 Control parameter equalisation for active and BOOL
reactive current regulators
824 0x2153.15 Reactive current control error FLOAT32
825 0x2153.16 Active current control error FLOAT32
1206 0x217F.07 Length motor cable FLOAT32
1208 0x217F.09 Cable cross section FLOAT32
52679 0x2151.0C Voltage limiting filter time constant FLOAT32
52680 0x2151.0D Voltage limiting Ud active BOOL
52681 0x2151.0E Voltage limiting Uq active BOOL
Tab. 459 Objects
6.1.4.2 PROFIdrive
Current regulator PNUs
position and velocity controllers and current regulators, the total inertia for the torque pilot control
and the filter time constant for the actual velocity value filter. When a control parameter set is
changed, the total inertia and the velocity filter is also changed.
The individual control parameter sets can be activated via the set table or via the device profile. The
switchover duration into another control parameter set can be influenced by the transition time. There
is a linear interpolation of all values during the switchover.
Parameters and diagnostic messages
44 Controller parameter Specifies the status of the activated control parameter set in the
set switchover status control parameter set switchover.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
226 Amplification gain Specifies the amplification gain in the parameter sets for the P-
position controller element in the position controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2210 Velocity controller Specifies the amplification gain in the parameter sets for the PI-
amplification gain element in the velocity controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2211 Velocity controller Specifies the integration constant in the parameter sets for the
integration constant PI-element in the velocity controller.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2223 Amplification gain Specifies the amplification gain "Active current" in the paramet-
current regulator (act- er sets for the PI-element in the current regulator.
ive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2224 Integration constant Specifies the integration constant "Active current" in the para-
current regulator (act- meter sets for the PI-element in the current regulator.
ive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2225 Amplification gain Specifies the amplification gain "Reactive current" in the para-
current regulator meter sets for the PI-element in the current regulator.
(reactive current) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
2227 Total inertia Specifies the total inertia torque of the drive train (axis, gear
unit, motor, load). A value input by the user is overwritten with
the total of all inertias from the configured drive train, including
the load, by calculation of the control parameters.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit kgm²
2228 Velocity filter filter Specifies the filter time constant for the actual velocity value fil-
time constant ter for the parameter sets.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 461 Parameters
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
44 0x2156.01 Controller parameter set switchover status BOOL
226 0x2227.01 ... 03 Amplification gain position controller FLOAT32
2210 0x2228.01 ... 03 Velocity controller amplification gain FLOAT32
Bit1) Description
Bit1) Description
Bit1) Description
6.1.5.2 PROFIdrive
Control parameter sets PNUs
6.2 Limitations
6.2.1 Limitation of Application
The setpoint specifications for the trajectory generator are limited via the application limitation, which
are prescribed by the active set table or profile operating mode (positioning, velocity or force/torque).
During the test, the variables of movement "velocity (v), acceleration (a), deceleration (d) and torque
(M)" are compared with the specified limitations (jerk is not limited). If all setpoint values lie within
the specified limitations, the trajectory generator calculates the path course for the specified setpoint
values. If the setpoint values lie outside the limitation, the setpoint values are limited to the respect-
ive value and a corrected trajectory is calculated. The torque can be asymmetrically limited via the
minimum and maximum torque. If one of the setpoint values reaches the limit, this can be requested
via a status.
The parameter velocity override Px.1309 can be used to influence the parameterised target velocity in
the range of 0 … 200 %. The value for the velocity override can be selected in the range from 0 ... 2.
The scaling for 100 % corresponds to the value 1. The setting affects the following movement types:
– Positioning records
– Jogging
– Homing
– Target value specification
Setpoint specification
v a d M
Application
limit
LIM1 LIM2 LIM3 +LIM4
–LIM4
v a d M
Trajectory generator
1301 Velocity limiting Specifies the velocity limiting status starting from the applica-
status tion limitation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1302 Acceleration limiting Specifies the acceleration limitation of the application limitation.
status Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1303 Torque limiting status Specifies the torque limitation starting from the application lim-
itation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1304 Limit value velocity Specifies the limit value for velocity limiting in the application
limiting limitation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1305 Limit value accelera- Specifies the limit value for the acceleration limitation in the
tion limiting application limitation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1306 Limit value decelera- Specifies the limit value for the deceleration limitation in the
tion limiting application limitation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
1307 Upper limit torque Specifies the upper limit value for the torque limitation in the
limitation application limitation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
1308 Lower limit torque Specifies the lower limit value for the torque limitation in the
limitation application limitation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
1309 Velocity override Specifies the velocity override in positioning and velocity mode.
The override can be set in the range from 0 ... 2. The normaliza-
tion for 100 % corresponds to the value of 1.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
11280611 Velocity override Specifies the velocity override in positioning and velocity mode.
The override can be set in the range 0 ... 200 %. The scaling for
100 % corresponds to the value of 0x4000.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 468 Parameter
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
6.2.1.2 PROFIdrive
Application Limit PNUs
Dynamic data
I 2t
iq_in5/iq_in6
Min
–1 –1 –1 –1
Control limit
manager
Max Min Max Min Ma x Min
Cascade control
+iq Resulting upper limit value active current (closed loop controller) 6109
M_in1 Lower limit value torque (closed loop controller) 852
M_in2 Upper limit value torque (closed loop controller) 853
M_in3 Maximum motor or servo drive torque 381
M_in4 Maximum driving torque axis 1199
–M Resulting lower limit value torque (closed loop controller) 6104
+M Resulting upper limit value torque (closed loop controller) 6105
v_in1 Lower limit value velocity (closed loop controller) 850
v_in2 Upper limit value velocity (closed loop controller) 851
v_in3 Maximum motor or servo drive velocity 382
–LIM2 Resulting lower limit value velocity (closed loop controller) 6100
+LIM2 Resulting upper limit value velocity (closed loop controller) 6101
Tab. 471 Legend for the block diagram of the control limitation
The resulting critical limit LIM2 affects the output of the position controllers
è 6.1.2 Position Controller.
381 Maximum motor or Specifies the maximum torque of the servo drive for transfer to
servo drive torque the configuration tool. The maximum torque must always be set
the same on the side of the controller and the servo drive.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
382 Maximum motor or Specifies the static critical limit "Maximum velocity" created
servo drive velocity from the minimum of the maximum values of the motor or servo
drive.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
624 Resulting maximum Specifies the static limit value "Maximum current" created from
current the minimum of the maximum values of the motor or servo
drive.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
625 Resulting minimum Specifies the static limit value "Minimum current" created from
current the minimum of the maximum values of the motor or servo drive
with negative signs.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
850 Lower limit value Specifies the dynamic limit value "Lower limit value of velocity"
velocity (closed loop specified by the user.
controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
851 Upper limit value Specifies the dynamic limit value "Upper limit value of velocity"
velocity (closed loop specified by the user.
controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
852 Lower limit value Specifies the dynamic limit value "Lower limit value of the
torque (closed loop torque" specified by the user.
controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
853 Upper limit value Specifies the dynamic limit value "Upper limit value of the
torque (closed loop torque" specified by the user.
controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
854 Lower limit value act- Specifies the dynamic limit value "Lower limit value of the active
ive current (closed current" specified by the user.
loop controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
855 Upper limit value act- Specifies the dynamic limit value "Upper limit value of the active
ive current (closed current" specified by the user.
loop controller) Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
1199 Maximum driving Specifies the maximum driving torque of the axis.
torque axis Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Nm
6100 Resulting lower limit Specifies the limit value "Lower limit value of velocity" for velo-
value velocity (closed city limiting.
loop controller) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
6101 Resulting upper limit Specifies the limit value "Upper limit value of velocity" for velo-
value velocity (closed city limiting.
loop controller) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
6104 Resulting lower limit Specifies the resulting minimum torque for torque limitation.
value torque (closed Access read/−
loop controller)
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
6105 Resulting upper limit Specifies the resulting maximum torque for torque limitation.
value torque (closed Access read/−
loop controller)
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
6108 Resulting lower limit Specifies the limit value "Lower limit value of the active cur-
value active current rent". (Conversion to the output-side torque is an internal calcu-
(closed loop control- lation)
ler) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
6109 Resulting upper limit Specifies the limit value "Upper limit value of the active cur-
value active current rent". (Conversion to the output-side torque is an internal calcu-
(closed loop control- lation)
ler) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
Tab. 472 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
381 0x2169.01 Maximum motor or servo drive torque FLOAT32
382 0x2169.02 Maximum motor or servo drive velocity FLOAT32
624 0x2169.07 Resulting maximum current FLOAT32
625 0x2169.08 Resulting minimum current FLOAT32
850 0x2168.01 Lower limit value velocity (closed loop control- FLOAT32
ler)
851 0x2168.02 Upper limit value velocity (closed loop control- FLOAT32
ler)
852 0x2168.03 Lower limit value torque (closed loop control- FLOAT32
ler)
853 0x2168.04 Upper limit value torque (closed loop control- FLOAT32
ler)
854 0x2168.05 Lower limit value active current (closed loop FLOAT32
controller)
855 0x2168.06 Upper limit value active current (closed loop FLOAT32
controller)
1199 0x217E.09 Maximum driving torque axis FLOAT32
6100 0x2168.08 Resulting lower limit value velocity (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
6101 0x2168.09 Resulting upper limit value velocity (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
6104 0x2168.0C Resulting lower limit value torque (closed loop FLOAT32
controller)
6105 0x2168.0D Resulting upper limit value torque (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
6108 0x2168.10 Resulting lower limit value active current FLOAT32
(closed loop controller)
6109 0x2168.11 Resulting upper limit value active current FLOAT32
(closed loop controller)
Tab. 474 Objects
6.2.2.2 PROFIdrive
Control limitation PNUs
Min
–M –iq +M +iq
itotal_max
Torque
limitation
i i
M M
M
–1 iq_max
The resulting critical limits iq and are the result of the control limitation è 6.2.2 Control limitation.
The minimum and maximum torque affects the output of the velocity controller
è 6.1.3 Velocity Controller.
Inertia compensations
The acceleration (a) of the motor, gear unit and coupling inertia reduces the effective torque at the
output shaft end, whereby the specified value for the torque limitation is not completely available for
accelerating the load. This can be compensated by the following parameters:
– Inertia Gear (Px.124321)
– Inertia coupling (Px.124322)
– Dynamic losses (Px.124323)
87 Setpoint value react- Specifies the reactive current setpoint for the current regulator.
ive current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
856 Limit value total cur- Specifies the limit value of the total current for the servo drive.
rent (closed loop con- Access read/write
troller)
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
2218 Minimum torque Specifies the minimum torque for torque limitation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
2219 Maximum torque Specifies the maximum torque for torque limitation.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
6104 Resulting lower limit Specifies the resulting minimum torque for torque limitation.
value torque (closed Access read/−
loop controller)
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
6105 Resulting upper limit Specifies the resulting maximum torque for torque limitation.
value torque (closed Access read/−
loop controller)
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
6108 Resulting lower limit Specifies the limit value "Lower limit value of the active cur-
value active current rent". (Conversion to the output-side torque is an internal calcu-
(closed loop control- lation)
ler) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
6109 Resulting upper limit Specifies the limit value "Upper limit value of the active cur-
value active current rent". (Conversion to the output-side torque is an internal calcu-
(closed loop control- lation)
ler) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
6112 Resulting upper limit Specifies the limit value of the total current.
value total current Access read/−
(closed loop control-
Update effective immediately
ler)
Unit Arms
124321 Inertia Gear Indicates the total inertia of all gears in the drive train. The value
is required for increasing the torque limitation during the accel-
eration and deceleration phase.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit kgm²
124322 Inertia coupling Indicates the inertia of the clutch in the drive train. The value is
required for increasing the torque limitation during the accelera-
tion and deceleration phase.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit kgm²
124323 Dynamic losses Indicates the static dynamic losses in Nm related to the drive
side. The value is required for increasing the torque limitation
during the acceleration phase.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit Nm
Tab. 477 Parameter
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
87 0x2153.08 Setpoint value reactive current FLOAT32
856 0x2168.07 Limit value total current (closed loop control- FLOAT32
ler)
2218 0x215B.0A Minimum torque FLOAT32
2219 0x215B.0B Maximum torque FLOAT32
6104 0x2168.0C Resulting lower limit value torque (closed loop FLOAT32
controller)
6105 0x2168.0D Resulting upper limit value torque (closed FLOAT32
loop controller)
6108 0x2168.10 Resulting lower limit value active current FLOAT32
(closed loop controller)
6109 0x2168.11 Resulting upper limit value active current FLOAT32
(closed loop controller)
6112 0x2168.14 Resulting upper limit value total current FLOAT32
(closed loop controller)
124321 0x2182.0F Inertia Gear FLOAT32
124322 0x217F.0A Inertia coupling FLOAT32
124323 0x217E.0B Dynamic losses FLOAT32
Tab. 478 Objects
6.2.3.2 PROFIdrive
Torque limitation PNUs
6104 11644.0 Resulting lower limit value torque (closed loop FloatingPoint
controller)
6105 11645.0 Resulting upper limit value torque (closed FloatingPoint
loop controller)
6108 11648.0 Resulting lower limit value active current FloatingPoint
(closed loop controller)
6109 11649.0 Resulting upper limit value active current FloatingPoint
(closed loop controller)
6112 11652.0 Resulting upper limit value total current FloatingPoint
(closed loop controller)
124321 12448.0 Inertia Gear FloatingPoint
124322 12449.0 Inertia coupling FloatingPoint
124323 12450.0 Dynamic losses FloatingPoint
Tab. 479 PNUs
v v Velocity (default) · – –
a M Torque (inertia) · · –
v M Torque (friction) · · –
x_in, v_in, a_in Set values position, velocity and acceleration as input variables of the pilot con-
trol
Setpoint management output position 290
Setpoint management output velocity 291
Setpoint management output acceleration 292
x_out, v_out, Setpoint values for the cascade controller
T_out Setpoint value position 90
Setpoint value velocity 91
Setpoint value torque 94
t_x <- Time_x Inactive time position setpoint value (integer multiple of 957
the device-specific scanning time of the closed-loop con-
troller)
t_v <- Filter_v Time constant velocity setpoint value filter 958
t_a <- Filter_a Time constant acceleration setpoint value filter 959
Factor_v Amplification gain velocity feed forward control 967
Factor_T Amplification gain torque feed forward control 968
Offset Offset torque 969
Inertia Total inertia 973
Comp_F Setpoint value friction compensation 974
The parameter can be used, for example, to assess the
component of the feed forward control from the friction
compensation by means of measured data recording
(trace).
Comp_T Setpoint value inertia compensation 975
The parameter can be used, for example, to assess the
component of the feed forward control from the inertia
compensation by means of measured data recording
(trace).
Node_v Support point velocity [rad/s] 976
Node_T Support point torque [Nm] 977
Tab. 481 Legend for the block diagram of pilot control
Certain parameters of the pilot control are not entered in user units, but in Nm or rad/s and their
respective diversions, for example. The conversion of the user unit to rad/s is carried automatically
by the device.
The inertia for the inertia compensation is stipulated in kgm² (Px.973) and the support points of the
table for the friction compensation Node_T (Px.976) in Nm and Node_v in rad/s (Px.977).
Parameter
90 Setpoint value posi- Position output from feed forward control as setpoint value for
tion the closed-loop controller
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
91 Setpoint value velo- Velocity output from feed forward control as setpoint value for
city the closed-loop controller
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
92 Setpoint value accel- Acceleration output from feed forward control as setpoint value
eration for the closed-loop controller
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
93 Setpoint value jerk Jerk output from feed forward control as setpoint value for the
closed-loop controller
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
94 Setpoint value torque Torque output from feed forward control as setpoint value for
the closed-loop controller
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
95 Feed forward control Current output from feed forward control
current output Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
957 Inactive time position Indicates the dead time of the position setpoint in integer
setpoint value samples of the position control loop.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
958 Time constant velocity Time constant velocity setpoint value filter
setpoint value filter Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
959 Time constant accel- Time constant acceleration setpoint value filter
eration setpoint value Access read/write
filter
Update effective immediately
Unit s
967 Amplification gain Amplification gain velocity feed forward control
velocity feed forward Access read/write
control
Update effective immediately
Unit −
968 Amplification gain Amplification gain torque feed forward control
torque feed forward Access read/write
control
Update effective immediately
Unit −
969 Offset torque Offset torque
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
973 Total inertia Specifies the total inertia torque of the drive train (axis, gear
unit, motor, load). A value input by the user is overwritten with
the total of all inertias from the configured drive train, including
the load, by calculation of the control parameters.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit kgm²
974 Setpoint value friction The parameter can be used, for example, to assess the compon-
compensation ent of the feed forward control from the friction compensation
by means of measured data recording (trace).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
975 Setpoint value inertia The parameter can be used, for example, to assess the compon-
compensation ent of the feed forward control from the inertia compensation by
means of measured data recording (trace).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
976 Support point velocity Maximum of 16 support points via Index 0 ... 15. Velocity [rad/s]
[rad/s] of the drive train (axis, gear unit, motor, load) based on the gear
unit output.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
977 Support point torque Maximum of 16 support points via Index 0 ... 15. Torque [Nm] of
[Nm] the drive train (axis, gear unit, motor, load) based on the gear
unit output.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Nm
978 Number of support Number of support points for which the look-up table friction
points compensation is to be used.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 482 Parameter
The friction is compensated via a look-up table. In the table torque is plotted via support points via
angular velocity. Linear interpolation is performed between the support points. The input variable is
always the angular velocity independent of the selected user unit. The output variable is the torque. If
the input variable is larger or smaller than the last value of the support point of the angular velocity,
the last value of the torque support point is used as output variable.
The use of an offset can, for example, be practical for a vertical mounting position of an axis.
The ouput variables for the velocity and torque control can be weighted via separate factors.
Example for inertia compensation
With the inertia compensation a torque can be pilot controlled in dependence of the total inertia in the
drive system. The torque is composed of the total inertia multiplied by the set value velocity.
Example of the drive system:
– EMMS-ST-57-M-SEB-G2
– EMGA-60-P-G3-SST-57
– ELGR-TB-55-1000-0H
– Load mass 5 kg
Excerpt data sheet ELGR axis:
Technical data
Size 57-M
Motor
…
Parameter Value
P1.978.0.0 15
Tab. 486 Number of support points
6.3.4 PROFIdrive
Pilot control PNUs
Damping
dB
Bandwith
Hz
FFilter
Fig. 89 Filter band width and filter frequency
40 Filter frequency notch Fixes the filter frequency of the notch filter.
filter Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Hz
49 Band width of notch Fixes the filter band width of the notch filter.
filter Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit Hz
50 Notch filter output Specifies the filtered setpoint value of the active current.
active current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
51 Activation of notch fil- Fixes whether the notch filter is active or inactive.
ter – 1: active
– 0: inactive
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
52 Setpoint value active Specifies the unfiltered setpoint value of the active current.
current unfiltered Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
Tab. 490 Parameter
06 | 00 | 00082 Notch filter frequency invalid The parameterisation of the notch filter fre-
(100663378) quency is invalid
Tab. 491 Diagnostic Messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
40 0x2221.01 ... 03 Filter frequency notch filter FLOAT32
49 0x2222.01 ... 03 Band width of notch filter FLOAT32
50 0x2223.01 ... 03 Notch filter output active current FLOAT32
51 0x2224.01 ... 03 Activation of notch filter BOOL
52 0x2152.06 Setpoint value active current unfiltered FLOAT32
Tab. 492 Objects
6.4.3 PROFIdrive
Notch filter PNUs
6.5 Auto-tuning
6.5.1 Function
Auto tuning can be used to determine the control parameters for position and velocity controllers. The
basis for this is a current regulator that has already been designed and suitable start parameters for
position controllers and velocity controllers, as well as the amplitude of the excitation signal. The start
parameters are determined automatically on the basis of the drive configuration. Measurements are
necessary as basis for the layout. The number of measurements can be adjusted. The measurements
can be carried out during the standstill or during a movement command.
Start auto
tuning
System stimulation
Traversing task
Calculation
Averaging
Controller layout
Fig. 90
The use of the default setting "8 identification cycles" is recommended for averaging.
System excitation:
– Amplification gain noise signal generator
Drive movement (option):
– Drive is moving during identification (activate)
– Movement stroke during the identification
– Maximum velocity during the identification
– Maximum acceleration during the identification
– Maximum deceleration during the identification
– Maximum jerk during the identification
Recommendation: For drives with high friction (e. g. plain-bearing guide) activate parameter "Move
drive ...".
With the 1st identification cycle the axis moves in the positive direction up to the target of the move-
ment stroke. At the 2nd identification cycle the axis moves back again to the starting point. The move-
ment is repeated with each further double cycle.
8618 Time delay noise sig- Specifies the time delay noise signal for the start of the identific-
nal for the start identi- ation.
fication Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
8619 Identification with Specifies the activation for the drive moving during the identific-
movement ation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
8620 Number of identifica- Specifies the number of identifications for averaging.
tions for averaging Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
8621 Maximum movement Specifies the movement stroke during the identification.
stroke during the Access read/write
identification
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8622 Maximum velocity Specifies the maximum velocity during the identification.
during the identifica- Access read/write
tion
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8623 Maximum accelera- Specifies the maximum acceleration during the identification.
tion during the identi- Access read/write
fication
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8624 Maximum decelera- Specifies the maximum deceleration during the identification.
tion during the identi- Access read/write
fication
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
8625 Maximum jerk during Specifies the maximum jerk during the identification.
the identification Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 494 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
860 0x2173.01 Status auto tuning UINT8
8601 0x2173.02 Result amplification gain of position controller FLOAT32
8602 0x2173.03 Result integration constant of velocity control- FLOAT32
ler
8603 0x2173.04 Result amplification gain of velocity controller FLOAT32
8611 0x2174.01 Start value position controller amplification FLOAT32
gain
8612 0x2174.02 Start value velocity controller amplification FLOAT32
gain
8613 0x2174.03 Start value velocity controller integration con- FLOAT32
stant
8614 0x2174.04 Filter time constant velocity controller FLOAT32
6.5.1.2 PROFIdrive
Auto-tuning PNUs
A test run can no longer be performed after the parameters have been taken over.
Execute
Testmode
Validation completed
Fig. 91
The parameters resulting from auto tuning can be changed manually, and an optional test run can be
started with them.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
8630 0x2174.0D Number of validation movements UINT8
8631 0x2174.0E Movement stroke during validation movement SINT64
8632 0x2174.0F Maximum velocity during validation movement FLOAT32
8633 0x2174.10 Maximum acceleration during validation FLOAT32
movement
8634 0x2174.11 Maximum deceleration during validation FLOAT32
movement
8635 0x2174.12 Maximum jerk during validation movement FLOAT32
Tab. 500 Objects
6.5.2.2 PROFIdrive
Test run PNUs
7 Technology functions
7.1 Cam controller (position trigger)
7.1.1 Function
When parameterised positions (x1, x2) are reached, the cam controller function generates trigger sig-
nals at the trigger output (TRG). The position switch and rotor position switch, for example, can be
simulated using this function.
The cam controller can be activated using the record table è 4.5 Command for record selection. This
activation applies the parameterised values (Px.112700 … …Px.112712) as currently valid parameters
(Px.112713 … Px.112725).
Example: the value of parameter Px.112700 (Cam controller mode) is applied as the value for paramet-
er Px.112713 (current cam controller mode).
The desired trigger output must be parameterised for the function (parameters Px.11303 and
Px.11304). The source (Source ...) of the positions can be selected (e.g. primary encoder). The posi-
tions (x1, x2) can be freely defined within the modulo limits (+Mod, –Mod).
Using the index of the pertinent parameters, several switching points per trigger output can be con-
figured within the modulo range. Various modes are available for the function
(è Tab. 505 Possible modes of the cam controller function). The switching duration (t1, t2) of the trig-
ger output, for example, can be parameterised or depend on the defined switching limit values (x1,
x2).
Tt1
+Mod Mode x1 t1
Tt*V
Set
ON Logic TRG
-
Source
Tt*V
Reset
–Mod Dir Hy
Source 1, 2, ... Source of the position, e.g. primary encoder, secondary encoder; –
Tab. 502 Legend for the block diagram of the cam controller
Timing
Hysteresis
The hysteresis suppresses undesired switching procedures around the switching point during fluctu-
ations. The hysteresis refers to the switching point, including the offset due to the delay compensa-
tion.
An example is shown in the diagram below: All additional timing diagrams do not depict the hyster-
esis.
+Dir
v * Tt1 v * Tt2
1
TRG
0
–Mod x1 x2 +Mod
Hy Hy
Signal curve depending on the switching function, delay compensation and hysteresis in "Automat-
ic" mode (6) – examples
a) Positive direction
+Dir
v * Tt1 v * Tt2
1
TRG
0
–Mod x1 x2 +Mod
–Dir
v * Tt2 v * Tt1
1
TRG
0
–Mod x1 x2 +Mod
v * Tt2 v * Tt1
+/–Dir
v * Tt1 v * Tt2
1
TRG
0
–Mod x1 x2 +Mod
Signal curve depending on switching function, delay compensation and hysteresis in automatic
mode (6) with the switching characteristic time-controlled On (2), example - positive direction
After switching point x1 is reached, the trigger output for the duration of the parameterised switch-on
time is activated. The switching time t1 always refers to the switching point x1, independent of the dir-
ection of movement.
v * Tt1 +Dir
1
TRG
0
–Mod x1 +Mod
t1
112700 Cam controller mode Determines the mode of the cam controller function.
For detailed information
è Tab. 505 Possible modes of the cam controller function.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112701 Cam controller source Determines the source of the measured values.
This means:
0: primary encoder
1: secondary encoder (device-specific)
2: set position
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112702 Upper limit value Determines the upper limit value for the modulo calculation.
modulo When the upper limit value is exceeded, the position jumps to
the lower limit value.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112703 Lower limit value Determines the lower limit value for the modulo calculation.
modulo When the lower limit value is undershot, the position jumps to
the upper limit value.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112704 Inactive time com- Determines the inactive time compensation for the signal
pensation of first change for the first switching point. With this parameter, switch-
switching point on delays of external components can be compensated.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
112705 Inactive time com- Determines the inactive time compensation for the signal
pensation of second change for the second switching point. With this parameter,
switching point switch-on delays of external components can be compensated.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
112706 Hysteresis Through the determination of the hysteresis range, undesired
switching procedures are suppressed around the switching
point during fluctuations.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112707 Switching time Determines the switching time for time-based manual switching
(manual) (mode 4/5).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
112708 Selection of switching Determines the direction of movement at which the cam switch
function shall activate.
– 0: Negative/positive direction
– 1: Positive direction
– 2: Negative direction
Depending on the product design, several cams can be paramet-
erised within the defined modulo range.
Index 0: cam switch 1
Index 1: cam switch 2
Index 2: (depending on the product design)
Index 3: ...
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112709 Selection of switching Determines the switching behaviour of the cam switch. For the
characteristics On to Off switching function, the switching points are specified
in parameters Px.112710 and Px.112711. The time for the time-
controlled switching behaviour is specified via parameter
Px.112712.
112718 Current inactive time Specifies the current delay compensation of the second switch-
second switching ing point for the switch-on process.
point Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
112719 Current hysteresis Specifies the current hysteresis. In the hysteresis range, switch-
ing procedures are suppressed around the switching point dur-
ing fluctuations.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112720 Current switching Specifies the current switch-on time for mode 4.
time (manual) Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
112721 Current selection of Specifies the current direction of movement at which the cam
switching function switch activates.
– 0: Negative/positive direction
– 1: Positive direction
– 2: Negative direction
Index 0: cam switch 1
Index 1: cam switch 2
Index 2: (depending on the product design)
Index 3: …
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112722 Current selection of Specifies the current switching behaviour of the cam switch.
switching character- This means:
istics – 0: Inactive
– 1: Cam switch On/Off
– 2: Cam switch ON, time-controlled
– 3: Cam switch OFF, time-controlled
Index 0: cam switch 1
Index 1: cam switch 2
Index 2: (depending on the product design)
112727 Modulo position for Specifies the current runtime-compensated module position for
the logic (OFF) the logic (Off).
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112728 Cam switch status Specifies the status of the trigger output.
ON/OFF Access read/−−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112729 Status modulo limit Flag that indicates that modulo limits have been reached. The
reached signal duration amounts to 1 ms.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112730 Status active cam Specifies which cam switch is active.
switch Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112731 Counter NO modulo Specifies how often the modulo limits have been not exceeded.
cycles Access −/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112732 Offset modulo posi- Offset of the modulo position
tion Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112733 Initialisation of mod- Default value for the reference position
ulo Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112734 Current offset modulo Specifies the currently used offset of the modulo position.
position Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112735 Counter modulo Counter for the modulo cycles
cycles Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
112736 Modulo hysteresis Hysteresis for the modulo position for secure detection during a
modulo run
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
112737 Current modulo hys- Specifies the currently used hysteresis for the modulo position
teresis for secure detection during a modulo run.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 504 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
112700 0x2192.01 Cam controller mode UINT16
112701 0x2192.03 Cam controller source UINT16
112702 0x2192.05 Upper limit value modulo SINT64
112703 0x2192.07 Lower limit value modulo SINT64
112704 0x2192.09 Inactive time compensation of first switching FLOAT32
point
112705 0x2192.0B Inactive time compensation of second switch- FLOAT32
ing point
112706 0x2192.0D Hysteresis SINT64
112707 0x2192.0F Switching time (manual) FLOAT32
112708 0x226F.01 ... 04 Selection of switching function UINT16
112709 0x2270.01 ... 04 Selection of switching characteristics UINT16
112710 0x2271.01 ... 04 First switching point SINT64
112711 0x2272.01 ... 04 Second switching point SINT64
112712 0x2273.01 ... 04 Switching time (automatic) FLOAT32
112713 0x2192.11 Current cam controller mode UINT16
112714 0x2192.13 Current cam controller source UINT16
7.1.3 PROFIdrive
Cam controller PNUs
Mode
Enable
& CAP
+Mod
Select
Edge –LIM
Source ...
DONE
Source ...
+LIM
–Mod
x_out
t_out
Timing
The timing diagram shows an example of position detection in mode 2 (once with window). Trigger
signals outside of the window are not accepted.
Fig. 99 Touch probe timing diagram (example of “Once with window” touch probe mode)
113000 Touch probe mode Determines the mode of the touch probe function. The specified
mode is effective on activation of the touch probe function.
For detailed information
è Tab. 511 Possible modes of the touch probe function.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113001 Touch probe source Determines the source of the measured values.
This means:
– 0: primary encoder
– 1: secondary encoder (device-specific)
– 2: ... (depending on the product design)
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113002 Selection trigger Determines the type of signal edge with which the measurement
event shall be triggered.
This means:
– 0: inactive
– 1: positive edge
– 2: negative edge
– 3: positive or negative edge
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
113013 Current upper limit Specifies the upper limit for trigger signals within the modulo
value trigger event range. Trigger signals at positions above the limit are ignored.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113014 Touch probe position Specifies the position of the last measurement.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113015 Time stamp touch Specifies the time of the last measurement based on the system
probe position time of the device.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113016 Trigger event initiated Indicates whether the trigger signal was triggered within the
specified range. With cyclic acquisition, the signal is set up to
the transition of the modulo limit and is reset at the transition.
This means:
– 0: no valid trigger signal
– 1: valid trigger signal was triggered
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113017 Trigger event NOT ini- Specifies whether a trigger signal has been triggered within the
tiated defined range if the module limit is exceeded. 1 means that the
trigger signal has not been triggered
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113018 Trigger events Specifies the number of valid measurements. The parameter
counter triggered value increases at every valid measurement.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113019 Trigger events Specifies the number of invalid measurements. The parameter
counter NOT triggered value increases at every invalid measurement.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113020 Counter modulo Specifies how often the modulo limits have been exceeded.
cycles Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113021 Status touch probe Specifies the status of the CAPx input.
input This means:
– 0: low level
– 1: high level
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113022 Status modulo limit Flag that indicates that modulo limits have been exceeded. The
reached signal duration amounts to 1 ms.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113023 Modulo position Modulo of the reference position
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113024 Offset modulo posi- Offset of the modulo position
tion Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113025 Initialisation of mod- Default value for the reference position
ulo Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113026 Current offset modulo Specifies the currently used offset of the modulo position.
position Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113027 Time stamp touch Time stamp for the last recorded touch probe position positive
probe position posit- edge CiA402
ive CiA402 Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113028 Time stamp touch Time stamp for the last recorded touch probe position negative
probe position negat- edge CiA402
ive CiA402 Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113029 Touch probe position Position detected by touch probe positive edge CiA402. The cap-
positive CiA402 tured position refers to the current value of the source without
considering the modulo setting.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113030 Touch probe position Position detected by touch probe negative edge CiA402. The
negative CiA402 captured position refers to the current value of the source
without considering the modulo setting.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113031 Counter initiated trig- Counter of initiated trigger events for the positive edge CiA402
ger events positive Access read/−
edge CiA402
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113032 Counter initiated trig- Counter of initiated trigger events for the negative edge CiA402
ger events negative Access read/−
edge CiA402
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113033 Touch probe status Touch probe status CiA402
CiA402 Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
113034 Modulo hysteresis Hysteresis for the modulo position for secure detection during a
modulo run
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113035 Current modulo hys- Specifies the currently used hysteresis for the modulo position
teresis for secure detection during a modulo run.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
113036 Delay time Specifies the delay time during which the digital input signal is
delayed
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
113037 Current delay time Specifies the currently used delay time during which the digital
input signal is delayed
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 510 Parameter
+LIM –LIM
+LIM
accepted accepted
–LIM
accepted
+LIM
Fig. 100 Diagram of trigger ranges (example)
(6) à 0x60B9, bit 2 = 1 Status "Touch probe 1 negative edge stored" is set
(6a) à 0x60BB Touch probe position 1 negative value is stored
(7) 0x60B8, bit 4 = 0 Sample positive edge is disabled
(8) à 0x60B9, bit 0 = 0 Status "Touch probe 1 positve edge stored" is reset
(8a) 0x60BA Touch probe position 1 positive value is not changed
(9) 0x60B8, bit 4 = 1 Sample positive edge is enabled
(10) à 0x60BA Touch probe position 1 positive value is not changed
(11) External touch probe signal has positive edge
(12) à 0x60B9, bit 1 = 1 Status "Touch probe 1 positve edge stored" is set
(12a) à 0x60BA Touch probe position 1 positive value is stored
(13) 0x60B8, bit 0 = 0 Touch probe 1 is disabled
(14) à0x60B9, bit 0, 1, Status bits are reset
2=0
(14a) à 0x60BA, 0x60BB Touch probe position 1 positive/negative value are not changed
Tab. 513 Legend for touch probe timing graph via CiA402
For objects 0x60B8 and 0x60B9, the second instance starts with bit 8 (e. g. 0x60B8: bit 8 = 1; Enable
touch probe 2; bit 9 = 0; Trigger first event).
Object 0x60B8
Object 0x60B8 enables the configuration of the Touch Probe function.
7.2.3 PROFIdrive
Position sensing PNUs
Modes Description
Modes Description
Automatic opera- If the velocity falls below the parameterised target velocity, the servo drive
tion automatically switches to open-loop operation. If the parameterised target velo-
city is exceeded, the servo drive switches back to closed-loop operation. Motion
monitoring functions are supported as configured.
– Motion monitoring functions are supported as configured.
– If functions require closed-loop operation, they are automatically run in
closed-loop operation. If force mode is requested, it is automatically run in
closed-loop operation.
Tab. 518 Modes of open-loop operation
Parameters and diagnostic messages
The desired operating mode can be specified with the Px.4005 parameter. If open-loop operation
without encoder is required even though the motor has an encoder, the parameter Px.4001.0.0 (pure
Open-Loop) must be activated and the commutation-angle detection set to deactivated (Px.668.0.0).
The holding current of the motor can be reduced in open-loop operation after standstill detection. The
current reduction can be switched on and off with the Px.4026 parameter. The deceleration time and
the magnitude of the current reduction can be specified by parameterisation.
4005 Selection of mode of Specifies the mode of operation for the open loop or closed loop
operation open operation used when starting the device.
loop/closed loop Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4006 Selection of mode of Specifies the mode of operation for the open-loop or closed-
operation loop operation.
This means:
0: Automatic operation
1: Open loop operation
2: closed loop operation
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4007 Active mode of opera- Displays the active mode of operation for the open-loop or
tion closed-loop operation
This means:
0: Automatic operation
1: Open loop operation
2: closed loop operation
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4008 Velocity switching Specifies the switching threshold from which velocity can be
threshold automatically switched from open-loop operation to closed-loop
operation.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
4010 Current rise time Specifies the time with which mode of operation is open loop
and switched to closed-loop in automatic mode.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
4026 Current reduction Activates the current reduction after detection of standstill
activation Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4027 Current reduction Specifies the delay time with which current reduction is effective
delay time after reaching standstill detection.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit s
4028 Current reduction Specifies the scaling factor for current reduction based on the
scaling factor nominal current
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6694 Factor current set- Defines the factor for the current setpoint used for the commut-
point value ation angle determination.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 519 Parameters
06 | 02 | 00273 Change of control structure not The change of the control structure is not per-
(100794641) permissible missible
06 | 02 | 00274 Motion command not permissible The motion command is not permissible in
(100794642) controlled operation
06 | 02 | 00275 Change to closed loop operation Change to closed loop operation not permiss-
(100794643) not permissible ible because the commutation angle is not
valid
Tab. 520 Diagnostic messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
270 0x219C.02 Setpoint value reactive current FLOAT32
662 0x219C.03 Time current increase FLOAT32
4001 0x219C.04 Activation of open loop operation BOOL
4004 0x219C.07 Active control structure UINT32
4005 0x219C.08 Selection of mode of operation open UINT32
loop/closed loop
4006 0x219C.09 Selection of mode of operation UINT32
4007 0x219C.0A Active mode of operation UINT32
4008 0x219C.0B Velocity switching threshold FLOAT32
4010 0x219C.0D Current rise time FLOAT32
4026 0x219C.15 Current reduction activation BOOL
4027 0x219C.16 Current reduction delay time FLOAT32
4028 0x219C.17 Current reduction scaling factor FLOAT32
6694 0x219C.14 Factor current setpoint value FLOAT32
Tab. 521 Objects
7.3.2 PROFIdrive
Open-loop operation PNUs
102201 Activation of field Specifies whether the field weakening is active or inactive.
weakening Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
102202 Field weakening Displays whether the field weakening is active or inactive.
status Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
102203 Field weakening Displays the current reactive current of the field weakening
reactive current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
102207 Current maximum Specifies the currently available maximum reactive current.
reactive current Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit Arms
Tab. 523 Parameter
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
102201 0x219F.01 Activation of field weakening BOOL
102202 0x219F.02 Field weakening status BOOL
102203 0x219F.03 Field weakening reactive current FLOAT32
102207 0x219F.07 Current maximum reactive current FLOAT32
Tab. 524 Objects
7.4.2 PROFIdrive
Field weakening PNUs
8 Safety signals
8.1 Function
The device continuously monitors the plausibility of its own feedback signals for the STO safety sub-
function. The monitoring checks that the feedback signals are available within the tolerance period for
triggering the safety sub-function. If the monitoring detects a fault, a message is triggered and the
parametrised fault response is initiated. The following feedback signals are monitored:
Detailed information on the safety sub-functions of the product can be found in the Description Safety
sub-function è 1.1 Applicable documents.
The status of the feedback signal for the STO safety sub-function can be functionally monitored by
parameters.
Parameters and diagnostic messages
950 SFB error status Shows what feedback signal was not received on time in case of
fault. The following allocation applies:
Bit 0: STA feedback signal
This means:
– 0: no fault
– 1: fault in time monitoring
All other bits have the value 0.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit –
952 STA hysteresis time Shows the tolerance time for the STA feedback signal.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 527 Parameters
8.2 CiA402
Objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: saved base unit for the object is effective.
950 0x2178.1 SFB error status UINT32
951 0x2178.2 Feedback signals UINT32
952 0x2178.3 STA hysteresis time FLOAT32
Tab. 529 Objects
The device saves all of the messages in the volatile message directory. The device also has a non-
volatile error memory. Messages, for which the history should be traceable at a later date, are recor-
ded in the error memory. The classification of errors ensures that the response to the error by the
device can be adjusted to individual requirements. The device provides the trace function to analyse
errors and for optimisation purposes. The trace function can, for example, be used to simultaneously
record various measuring data for a diagnostic event.
On-site via LEDs The LEDs, for example, display the following:
– Device status
– Status of the power supply
– Status of the device interfaces
– Status of the safety equipment
For additional information see "Description, assembly and install-
ation" è 1.1 Applicable documents.
Diagnostics via the commission- The plug-in of the Festo Automation Suite, for example, provides
ing software the following functions è 2 CMMT-ST Plug-in:
– Access to the message directory (current messages)
– Access to the error history (message history)
– Error acknowledgment
– Error classification to categorise diagnostic events
– Recording measuring data (trace function)
Diagnostics via web server The web server offers, for example, the following functions
è 10 Web server:
– Access to the message directory (current messages)
– Access to the error history (message history)
– Error acknowledgment
Diagnostics via fieldbus Special diagnostic functions and communication services are
– Request diagnostic status available, depending on the fieldbus used.
– Fieldbus-specific diagnostic
functions
Tab. 530 Diagnostics options
Information Diagnostic event with – Generation of the message and entry in the
low degree of severity message directory; the event has no further
influence.
No entry is added to the error memory as
standard
Tab. 532 Information Level
Warning Diagnostic event with – Generation of the message and entry in the
medium degree of message directory
severity to inform – The status LED indicates the warning.
about impending error – No change to the operating status
states – No change to the ready signal
– Depending on the configuration, an entry is
added to the error memory.
Tab. 533 Warning Level
Diagnostic status
4 16 1 = Warning
Error limit
6 64 1 = Error stop category 2
8 256 1 = Error stop category 1
12 4096 1 = Error stop category 0 Highest
Tab. 537 Diagnostic status
The diagnostic status parameter can be requested via the device profile of the fieldbus being used.
Parameters and diagnostic messages
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
300 0x210D.01 Diagnostic device status UINT16
112819 0x218E.09 Error active BOOL
Tab. 539 Objects
9.3.2 PROFIdrive
Diagnostic status PNUs
Status Description
1. Combine main group, sub-group and error number byte by byte as a hexadecimal 4-byte value:
Main group = byte 4
Sub-group = byte 3
Error number = byte 1 and 2
2. The resultant hexadecimal 4-byte number displayed as a decimal number equals the diagnostic
number in the ungrouped overview.
Serious errors cannot be acknowledged. In this case, the error status may be able to be closed by
switching the device on again (power OFF/ON). If the serious error immediately occurs again, please
contact Festo Service team (service required).
Information on troubleshooting è 9.4.6 Diagnostic messages with information for fault clearance.
Messages and errors are acknowledged via:
– The CTRL-EN digital input (trailing edge)
– The device profile of the fieldbus being used
– The plug-in è 2 CMMT-ST Plug-in
– The web server è 10 Web server
Error
No Error
Error reaction
Acknowledge signal
Name Description
Name Description
Value list:
Warning (16)
Information (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: Save (1) 7
Cell Content/description
1 Diagnostic number in grouped overview.
Followed by the diagnostic number in brackets in the ungrouped overview.
2 Name of the message
3 Description of the diagnostic event
4 Remedy: Remedial measures
5 Classification: Default error response (factory setting)
6 Specification of whether classification can be parameterised:
– No: Error response cannot be parameterised
– Parameter ID Px... = Error response can be parameterised
Value list: List of error responses that can be parameterised
7 Error memory: Default setting of whether message is added to the error memory
Cell Content/description
8 Specification of whether addition to the error memory can be parameterised:
– Can be parameterised: No = addition cannot be parameterised
– Parameter ID Px... = Addition can be parameterised
The value list always applies:
– Do not save (0)
– Save (1)
Tab. 546 Legend for sample diagnostic message
The following reference list for the diagnostic messages is sorted by the ID in the grouped overview.
01 | 02 | 00015 I²t monitoring: output tion Can be parameterised: Px.6325, value list:
(16908303) stage error limit Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.6326
01 | 02 | 00016 I²t monitoring: output I²t monitoring: output stage in standstill warning limit
(16908304) stage v0 warning limit Remedy – Reduce target current/setpoint torque
– Reduce standstill time
– Allow minimal movement >5 Hz electrical
rotational frequency
Classifica- Default: ignore (2)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.6327, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.6328
01 | 02 | 00017 I²t monitoring: output I²t monitoring: output stage in standstill error limit
(16908305) stage v0 error limit Remedy – Reduce target current/setpoint torque
– Reduce standstill time
– Allow minimal movement >5 Hz electrical
rotational frequency
Classifica- Default: ignore (2)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.6329, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.6330
03 | 02 | 00048 Warning threshold: Warning threshold: Temperature in power unit too low
(50462768) Temperature in power Remedy – Check ambient conditions
unit too low
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.922, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.923
03 | 02 | 00049 Temperature in power Temperature in output stage too low
(50462769) unit too low Remedy – Check ambient conditions
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
03 | 02 | 00050 Warning threshold: Warning threshold: Power unit overtemperature
(50462770) Power unit overtem- Remedy – Temperature display plausible?
perature – Device fan defective?
– Device overloaded?
– Check installation conditions; control cab-
inet fan filter dirty?
– Check drive layout (possible overloading
during continuous operation)
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.926, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.927
05 | 02 | 00062 Task ignored as safety Task could not be executed as a safety function is reques-
(84017214) function requested ted
Remedy – Check that logic level of safety function
inputs is correct
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00064 Task ignored as DC- Task could not be executed as no DC link voltage is
(84017216) Link coupling not present or it was not yet detected
ready Remedy – Check mains voltage is present
– Check braking resistor is present, if
required
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00065 Task ignored due to The motion task was rejected in the current status
(84017217) motion task error Remedy – Cancel current motion command with a
stop
– Wait for MC for current motion command
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.1733
05 | 02 | 00066 Task ignored as Task could not be executed as the encoder is not ready
(84017218) encoder not ready Remedy – Check encoder cable
– Check power supply for the encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00067 Task ignored as refer- Task could not be executed as the drive is not referenced
(84017219) encing missing Remedy – Home drive
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00068 Task ignored as reini- Task could not be executed as a reinitialisation is required
(84017220) tialisation is required due to a parameter change
Remedy – Run reinitialisation
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00069 Task ignored as Task could not be executed as a restart is required due to
(84017221) restart is required a parameter change
Remedy – Restart the device
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00071 Trajectory generator An error occurred in the trajectory generator when calcu-
(84017223) error lating a movement profile
Remedy – Check parameterisation task or set (com-
plete? unrealistic values?)
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.30127, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.30128
05 | 02 | 00072 Invalid position spe- The position specified for the trajectory generator is inval-
(84017224) cification of trajectory id
generator Remedy – Change specified position to valid range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00073 Invalid speed value of The speed specified for the trajectory generator is invalid
(84017225) trajectory generator Remedy – Change specified velocity to valid range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00074 Invalid acceleration The acceleration specified for the trajectory generator is
(84017226) value of trajectory invalid
generator Remedy – Change specified acceleration to valid
range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00075 Invalid deceleration The deceleration specified for the trajectory generator is
(84017227) value of trajectory invalid
generator Remedy – Change specified deceleration to valid
range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00076 Invalid jerk value of The jerk specified for the trajectory generator is invalid
(84017228) trajectory generator Remedy – Change specified jerk to valid range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00077 Trajectory generator An error occurred in the trajectory generator when calcu-
(84017229) error lating a movement profile
Remedy – Adjust dynamic values for the motion task
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00078 Stop ramp: Timeout Stop ramp: Timeout
(84017230) Remedy – Check value for stop ramp timeout (fric-
tion?).
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00079 Torque increase ramp The torque increase ramp is invalid
(84017231) invalid Remedy – Change torque increase ramp parameter
to valid range
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.1130225, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.1130226
05 | 02 | 00080 Simultaneous negat- Simultaneous negative/positive directional lock
(84017232) ive/positive direction- Remedy – Check HW limit switch logic
al lock
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00278 Job ignored because Task could not be executed because a directional lock is
(84017430) direction lock active active
Remedy – Note additional diagnostic messages and
eliminate the cause of the directional lock
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
05 | 02 | 00279 Fixed stop not detec- Fixed stop was not detected
(84017431) ted Remedy – Check that the workpiece is in front of the
target position
Classifica- Default: Info (4)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.4647, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.4648
05 | 02 | 00280 Monitoring window of Monitoring window of fixed stop left
(84017432) fixed stop left Remedy – Check that workpiece was not lost
Classifica- Default: Info (4)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.4649, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
06 | 00 | 00248 Motor type is not sup- tion Can be parameterised: Px.71429, value list:
(100663544) ported Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1a (1024)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.71433
06 | 00 | 00252 Incorrect paramet- The start and end voltages for reactive current braking are
(100663548) erisation of reactive incompatible
current braking Remedy – Check parameterisation of reactive cur-
rent braking
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
06 | 00 | 00313 Invalid parameterisa- The variable signaling function is incorrectly paramet-
(100663609) tion, variable mes- erised.
sage function Remedy – Check input parameters for data triggers
(axis assignment, instance selection)
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.1174230, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.1174231
06 | 02 | 00086 Sign limits Setpoint torque and velocity limit do not match.
(100794454) Remedy – Check limits for torque and current; signs
and limits must match (symmetrical?)
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
07 | 01 | 00118 Error: both hardware Error: both hardware limit switches activated
(117506166) limit switches activ- Remedy – Check parameterisation
ated – Check wiring
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.101110, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.101111
07 | 01 | 00119 Negative stroke limit Negative stroke limit reached
(117506167) reached Remedy – Check task
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.4676, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.4677
07 | 01 | 00120 Positive stroke limit Positive stroke limit reached
(117506168) reached Remedy – Check task
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.4678, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
07 | 02 | 00129 Out of target range tion Can be parameterised: Px.4669, value list:
(117571713) Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.4670
07 | 03 | 00135 Limit for velocity or A limit for the velocity or current is active
(117637255) current active Remedy – Reduce dynamic values for the motion
command
– Check velocity limiting parameters
– Check current limitation parameters
Classifica- Default: Info (4)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.52677, value list:
Info (4)
Invalid (0)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.52678
07 | 04 | 00136 Commutation finding Commutation finding failed
(117702792) failed Remedy – Check encoder (valid values / connected)
– For vertical axes with load: reduce load
mass
– Check configuration of commutation find-
ing and current regulator according to fric-
tion
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
07 | 04 | 00137 Direction error in com- An error has occurred during the commutation angle
(117702793) mutation finding search, the direction of rotation of the motor does not cor-
relate with the position from the encoder.
Remedy – Freely rotating motor shaft?
– Increase current injection for commuta-
tion angle detection
– Axis blocked?
– Adjust dynamic values for finding the
commutation angle
– Check whether the direction of rotation of
the encoder and the motor are compat-
ible.
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
08 | 04 | 00281 Process data not Process data not received at Sync time
(134480153) received at Sync time Remedy – Check interaction between process data
and sync time in open-loop control
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.758, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1a (1024)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
internal (1)
Invalid (0)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.759
08 | 09 | 00144 Required application The required application class is not supported
(134807696) class not supported Remedy – Only request application class supported
by the device (see documentation)
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.11280111
08 | 09 | 00145 The required telegram The required telegram is not supported
(134807697) is not supported Remedy – Only request telegrams supported by the
device (see documentation)
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.3030103
08 | 09 | 00299 Error life sign – Check the permissible failure rate of the
(134807851) telegrams (PNU 925).
– Check bus or controller for capacity utiliz-
ation
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
08 | 09 | 00382 Invalid configuration The extended process data are configured invalid.
(134807934) Extended process Remedy – Check expanded process data mapping
data
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.424201, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.424202
08 | 12 | 00250 Invalid mode of oper- An invalid mode of operation was requested
(135004410) ation Remedy – Check requested CiA402 operating mode
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.12236, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.12237
08 | 12 | 00272 Resolution of position The resolution of the position factor group is invalid
(135004432) factor group invalid Remedy – Adjust position factor group paramet-
erisation
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.45, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1a (1024)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
internal (1)
Invalid (0)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.46
09 | 00 | 00146 Safety function Safety function requested
(150995090) requested Remedy – none (info only)
Classifica- Default: Info (4)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.821, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: do not save (0)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.822
09 | 00 | 00147 Plausibility check of Error during plausibility check of safety feedback signals
(150995091) safety feedback sig- Remedy – Service required
nals
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
11 | 01 | 00163 User unit error An error has occurred when changing the user unit
(184615075) Remedy – Run reinitialisation again
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.11590
11 | 01 | 00244 Communication mod- The supply voltage to the communication module dropped
(184615156) ule supply voltage Remedy – Checking the power supply
– Restart device
Classifica- Default: Stop category 1 (256)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
11 | 02 | 00164 Process runtime Process runtime exceeded
(184680612) exceeded Remedy – internal error, service required
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
11 | 02 | 00165 Timeout process Timeout has occurred in process level 0
(184680613) level 0 Remedy – Service required
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
11 | 02 | 00166 Timeout process Timeout has occurred in process level 1
(184680614) level 1 Remedy – Service required
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
12 | 01 | 00209 Mileage warning Threshold value 1 (default: warning threshold) for the
(201392337) threshold reached mileage is reached
Remedy – Information
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.1419, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.14110
12 | 01 | 00210 Mileage error Threshold value 2 (default: error threshold) for the
(201392338) threshold reached mileage is reached
Remedy – Information
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.14113, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.14114
12 | 01 | 00211 Maximum load The maximum value for the load change is reached
(201392339) change value reached Remedy – Information
Classifica- Default: Info (4)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
12 | 01 | 00212 Load change warning Threshold value 1 (default: warning threshold) for the
(201392340) threshold reached load change is reached
Remedy – Information
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.1429, value list:
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.14210
12 | 01 | 00213 Load change error Threshold value 2 (default: error threshold) for the load
(201392341) threshold reached change is reached
Remedy – Information
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.14213, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: Px.14214
13 | 01 | 00214 Message acknowledg- Message acknowledgment completed
(218169558) ment Remedy – none (info only)
Classifica- Default: internal (1)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
13 | 01 | 00215 Diagnostics log file Diagnostic memory invalid
(218169559) has invalid format Remedy – Delete diagnostic memory
Classifica- Default: Warning (16)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
18 | 05 | 00239 BiSS-C encoder ana- Check the wiring of the encoder and the position resolu-
(302317807) lysis invalid tion of the BiSS-C protocol.
Remedy – Check encoder cable
– Restart device
Classifica- Default: Stop category 0 (4096)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00365 Invalid request Invalid request for the control word Gn_STW1.4...7, bits
(302449005) Gn_STW1.4...7 are reserved.
Remedy – Control word Check PROFIdrive encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00366 Function not suppor- An unsupported function in the control word Gn_STW1 is
(302449006) ted Gn_STW1 requested.
Remedy – Control word Check PROFIdrive encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00367 Axis parking not pos- Axis parking request cannot be executed because the axis
(302449007) sible is moving.
Remedy – Revoke controller enable before parking
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: Px.34241, value list:
Stop category 0 (4096)
Stop category 1a (1024)
Stop category 1 (256)
Stop category 2 (64)
Warning (16)
Info (4)
Ignore (2)
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00368 Error reference marks Error when searching for the reference marks because the
(302449008) for search requested function is not completely configured.
Remedy – Control word Check PROFIdrive encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00369 Error read position Error when reading the position of the reference mark
(302449009) reference mark because the function is not completely configured.
Remedy – Control word Check PROFIdrive encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
memory Can be parameterised: No
18 | 07 | 00370 Error measuring on Error when measuring the reference mark on the fly
(302449010) the fly because the function is not completely configured.
Remedy – Control word Check PROFIdrive encoder
Classifica- Default: Stop category 2 (64)
tion Can be parameterised: No
Error Default: save (1)
Data trigger Trigger type that can use all of the data in the parameter directory of the
device as a trigger signal. For example, a data trigger on the "Setpoint
value speed controller" parameter can start creating a record when the cal-
culated setpoint exceeds a certain value.
Diagnostics trigger Trigger type that can use a diagnostic event as a trigger signal thus
enabling data before and after a diagnostic event to be recorded. Often,
only the period of time just before and just after the error has occurred are
important for the diagnostics.
Tab. 548 Trigger types
After a recording has started, the measuring data is recorded in the trace memory (ring memory).
When the trigger event occurs, the measuring data is not retained on the device upon expiry of the
recording. The data is lost when a new recording is started and when the power supply is switched off.
Parameter
5500 Trace channel Determines whether the channel is activated or not. If the chan-
nel is activated, the assigned measured value is permanently
recorded in the ring memory after the recording has been star-
ted. The array ID is used for the channel assignment.
This means:
– 1 = Channel activated
– 0 = Channel not activated
5500.0.0: channel 0 …
5500.0.n: channel n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
5501 Axis ID trace data Specifies the axis ID of the signal that should be recorded. The
array ID is used for the channel assignment.
5501.0.0: channel 0 …
5501.0.n: channel n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
5502 Data ID trace data Specifies the data ID of the signal to be recorded. The array ID is
used for the channel assignment.
5502.0.0: channel 0 …
5502.0.n: channel n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
5503 Data instance ID trace Contains the instance number of the signal to be recorded. The
data array ID is used for the channel assignment.
5503.0.0: channel 0 …
5503.0.n: channel n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
5504 Array ID trace data Contains the array ID of the signal to be recorded. The array ID is
used for the channel assignment.
5504.0.0: channel 0 …
5504.0.n: channel n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 549 Parameter
Example
The following measured values of axis 1 should be recorded at the same time:
– Storage option in error log (P1.4682.0.0) to channel 0
– Actual position value (P1.128.0.0) to channel 1
6000 Axis ID data trigger Specifies the axis ID of the trigger signal.
0 = System
1 = axis 1 … n = axis n
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6001 Data ID data trigger Specifies the data ID of the trigger signal.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6002 Data instance ID data Specifies the data instance ID of the trigger signal.
trigger Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
6003 Array ID data trigger Specifies the array ID of the trigger signal.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
103104 Current diagnostics ID Specifies the current diagnostics ID of the current recording.
diagnostic trace Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
103105 Current data instance Specifies the current data instance ID of the current recording.
ID diagnostic trace Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
103106 Diagnostics trigger Specifies the trigger event.
The following is possible:
– 0 = Trigger the message
– 1 = Reset the message
– 2 = Trigger or reset the message
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
103107 Current diagnostics Specifies the currently used diagnostics trigger.
trigger The following is possible:
– 0 = Trigger the message
– 1 = Reset the message
– 2 = Trigger or reset the message
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 556 Parameter
Diagnostics trigger example
The recording should be started when the following diagnostic event occurs for axis 0:
– Following error position (Dx.117571710)
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
5500 0x2207.01 ... 08 Trace channel BOOL
5501 0x2208.01 ... 08 Axis ID trace data UINT16
5502 0x2209.01 ... 08 Data ID trace data UINT32
5503 0x220A.01 ... 08 Data instance ID trace data UINT16
5504 0x220B.01 ... 08 Array ID trace data UINT16
Tab. 558 Objects
Trace and trigger configuration objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
341 0x210F.02 Trigger type UINT32
556 0x2117.01 Data trace status UINT32
557 0x2117.02 Trace delay SINT32
558 0x2117.03 Recording length UINT32
559 0x2117.04 Down sampling factor UINT32
5516 0x2117.08 Maximum recording length UINT32
5517 0x2117.09 Basic sampling interval FLOAT32
Tab. 559 Objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
6000 0x211B.01 Axis ID data trigger UINT16
6001 0x211B.02 Data ID data trigger UINT32
6002 0x211B.03 Data instance ID data trigger UINT16
6003 0x211B.04 Array ID data trigger UINT16
6004 0x211B.05 Trigger event UINT32
60012 0x211B.0C Trigger level SINT64
60013 0x211B.0D Bit mask data trigger UINT64
Tab. 560 Objects
Objects for configuring the trigger event for diagnostic triggers
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
103100 0x2142.01 Axis ID diagnostic trace UINT16
103101 0x2142.02 Diagnostics ID diagnostic trace UINT32
103102 0x2142.03 Data instance ID diagnostic trace UINT16
103103 0x2142.04 Current axis ID diagnostic trace UINT16
103104 0x2142.05 Current diagnostics ID diagnostic trace UINT32
103105 0x2142.06 Current data instance ID diagnostic trace UINT16
103106 0x2142.07 Diagnostics trigger UINT32
103107 0x2142.08 Current diagnostics trigger UINT32
Tab. 561 Objects
9.5.2 PROFIdrive
Channel configuration PNUs
14111 Mileage error Specifies the second threshold value when the device should
threshold generate the second configured message.
Error threshold is deactivated at 0.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 566 Parameter
12 | 01 | 00208 Maximum mileage value reached Maximum value for the mileage is reached
(201392336)
12 | 01 | 00209 Mileage warning threshold Threshold value 1 (default: warning
(201392337) reached threshold) for the mileage is reached
12 | 01 | 00210 Mileage error threshold reached Threshold value 2 (default: error threshold)
(201392338) for the mileage is reached
Tab. 567 Diagnostic messages
Example
The mileage counter should be reset to 0 and the following threshold values should be parameterised:
– Warning threshold for mileage recording of axis 1: 90000000 user units
– Error threshold for mileage recording of axis 1: 100000000 user units
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1411 0x2184.01 Mileage 1 SINT64
1417 0x2184.05 Mileage warning threshold SINT64
14111 0x2184.08 Mileage error threshold SINT64
Tab. 569 Objects
9.6.1.2 PROFIdrive
Mileage counter PNUs
1421 Load change counter Specifies the current number of load changes for the corres-
1 ponding axis.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1427 Warning threshold Specifies the first threshold value when the device should gen-
load change counter erate the first configured message.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
14211 Error threshold load Specifies the second threshold value when the device should
change counter generate the second configured message.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 571 Parameter
12 | 01 | 00211 Maximum load change value The maximum value for the load change is
(201392339) reached reached
12 | 01 | 00212 Load change warning threshold Threshold value 1 (default: warning
(201392340) reached threshold) for the load change is reached
12 | 01 | 00213 Load change error threshold Threshold value 2 (default: error threshold)
(201392341) reached for the load change is reached
Tab. 572 Diagnostic messages
Example
The load change counter should be reset to 0 and the following threshold values should be paramet-
erised:
– Warning threshold for the load change counter of axis 1: 4500000 user units
– Error threshold for the load change counter of axis 1: 90000000 user units
9.6.2.1 CiA402
Load change counter objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1421 0x2185.01 Load change counter 1 SINT64
1427 0x2185.05 Warning threshold load change counter SINT64
14211 0x2185.08 Error threshold load change counter SINT64
Tab. 574 Objects
9.6.2.2 PROFIdrive
Load change counter PNUs
1423 Operating hour Specifies the number servo drive operating hours.
counter Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit s
Tab. 576 Parameters
Example
The operating hours counter should be read.
9.6.3.1 CiA402
Operating hour counter objects
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1423 0x2133.02 Operating hour counter FLOAT32
Tab. 578 Objects
9.6.3.2 PROFIdrive
Operating hour counter PNUs
10 Web server
10.1 Function
A web server is integrated into the device. The web server provides access to a dynamic English-lan-
guage website for the device. If access is prevented via web server, the web server can be deactivated
with the parameter Px.11280051. The website of the web server enables, for example, the following:
– Setting the IP configuration
– Diagnostics of servo drive
– Transfer of parameter files and firmware (upload and download)
Prerequisites for online connection with the web server
– The power supply of the device is switched on.
– The IP configuration of the device including subnet mask is set correctly.
– Device and PC are connected via the Ethernet interface (direct connection or connection over a
network).
IP address of the device
In the factory setting, the device has the following IP address:
192.168.0.1
If the IP configuration of the device has been changed, the current IP address can be determined with
the CMMT plug-in.
Call the web server
1. Open the Internet browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the device in the address line of the Internet browser.
Ä Then the website of the device appears.
Register Description
Register Description
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: saved basic unit for the object is effective.
11280051 0x21A4.01 Web server activation BOOL
Tab. 582 Objects
10.3 PROFIdrive
Web server PNUs
11 EtherCAT
11.1 General
This part of the documentation describes the implemented standards and the communications of the
CMMT in an EtherCAT network. It is targeted at people who are already familiar with the bus protocol.
EtherCAT (Ethernet for Controller and Automation Technology) is a standard developed by the "Ether-
CAT Technology Group (ETG)" association. Numerous device manufacturers are members of this user
organisation. EtherCAT is an open, real-time-capable Ethernet technology that has been standardised
by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
The firmware package includes an ESI file and it is also available as a separate file in the support
portal è www.festo.com/sp.
Controller CMMT
(Master) (Slave)
ESC
EtherCAT communication Sync manager
Process
Process data communication 1) Sync manager 2/3 data 4) CoE
Process data object request
Process data object response
Mailbox communication 2)
Mail-
SDO communication Sync manager 0/1 box5)
Service data object request Sync manager 0/1
Emergency communication
Emergency request
Clock Master
(Slave) 3) EtherCAT Synchronisation Distributed clocks
Ref clocks Ref Time DC Time
Ports è Ports
Termination è Termination
EtherCAT Slave Controller controls the cyclical synchronous processing and transmission of process
data.
11.3.4 Protocol
The CMMT supports the following protocols for exchanging communication data:
Protocol Description
CANopen over EtherCAT CoE Data transmission in accordance with CANopen, CiA301
Ethernet over EtherCAT EoE Data transmission in accordance with IEEE 802.3
File access over EtherCAT File transfer according to ETG specification
Tab. 586 Overview: protocol
Byte format
With EtherCAT, the 16-bit values (word) and the 32-bit values (double word) are presented as follows.
Ethernet Header EtherCAT Frame Header EtherCAT Protocol Data Ethernet FCS
14 Byte 2 Byte … Byte 4 Byte
Ether type: Type:
0x88A4 =EtherCAT 4= Process data communication
5= Mailbox communication
Mailbox Frame
CoE Frame
Emergency Frame
Standard CANopen Emergency Frame
By enabling communication, data can be exchanged between the CMMT and the other network
devices. All status transitions are controlled by the commands from the higher-order controller. The
CMMT does not perform autonomous status changes.
The graph shows all statuses and status transitions of the EtherCAT finite state machine.
(Power ON)
(Reset)
Init
(PS)
(OI) (SP)
(SO) (OS)
Operational (Op)
Status Status
Status Status
Power ON/RESET The CMMT was switched on, or a Reset was triggered.
The CMMT initialises itself and switches directly into the 'Init' status.
IP Mailbox communication (SDO) is started.
(Init è PreOp) The controller reads the device information from the EtherCAT Slave Con-
troller (ESC) and configures:
– Station address
– Sync Manager register for mailbox communication
PI Mailbox communication (PDO) is stopped.
(PreOp è Init)
PS Process data communication (PDO) is started.
(PreOp è SafeOp) The controller configures:
– Sync Manager register for process data communication
– PDO mapping and Distributed Clocks (DC)
SP Process data communication (PDO) is stopped.
(SafeOp è PreOp)
SO The controller transmits valid output data.
(SafeOp è Op)
OS The controller actively requests a change to the "Safe-Operational
(Op è SafeOp) (SafeOp)" status. The CMMT triggers a diagnostic message in accordance
with the configured response.
Sync manager 1
Sync channel 1 Mailbox send ç SDO
Sync manager 3
Sync channel 3 Process data input ç TxPDO
750 Sync manager com- Shows the communication types of the synchronisation man-
munication type Eth- ager for the EtherCAT communication.
erCAT Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
770 Sync manager x num- Shows the number of assigned PDOs in the synchronisation
ber of assigned PDOs managers 2/3 of the EtherCAT communication.
EtherCAT Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
771 PDO mapping object Shows the PDO Mapping object index of the assigned PDO of
index of assigned the EtherCAT communication
PDO EtherCAT Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 591 Parameters
11.5.2 Synchronisation
Transmission and processing of cyclical process data is specified by the Sync Manager synchronisa-
tion process. The synchronisation is controlled by the Distributed Clocks DC
è 11.6 Distributed clocks DC (Distributed Clocks).
The CMMT supports the following synchronisation mode:
– Free Run (no synchronisation)
– Process data (synchronisation to SM2 event)
– Sync (synchronisation with DC Sync 0 event)
Timing of EtherCAT DC
1057 Sync Delay Time Shows the maximum time [ns] between Sync 0 event and issue
of the output in Sync synchronisation mode.
The value is fixed = 0
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1058 Sync0 Cycle Time Shows the time [ns] between two Sync 0 events in Sync syn-
chronisation mode.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1059 Sync SM Event Shows the number of failed SM2 events in the Operational
Missed status in the Sync synchronisation mode.
The value is only up to date in the CiA object via EtherCAT, not
with access to the parameter Px.1059 via the plug-in.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1060 Sync cycle time too Shows the number of cycle time violations in the Operational
small status (cycle was not finished on time or the following cycle star-
ted too early).
The value is only up to date in the CiA object via EtherCAT, not
with access to the parameter Px.1060 via the plug-in.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
1061 Sync Error Shows the faulty synchronisation of the last cycle in Sync syn-
chronisation mode.
The value is only up to date in the CiA object via EtherCAT, not
with access to the parameter Px.1061 via the plug-in.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 594 Parameters
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
1050 0x212E.01 Synchronisation mode UINT16
1051 0x212E.02 Synchronisation process repetition time FLOAT32
1053 0x212E.04 Sync mode supported UINT16
1054 0x212E.05 Sync Minimum Cycle Time FLOAT32
1055 0x212E.06 Sync Calc And Copy Time FLOAT32
1056 0x212E.07 Sync Get Cycle Time UINT16
1057 0x212E.08 Sync Delay Time FLOAT32
1058 0x212E.09 Sync0 Cycle Time FLOAT32
1059 0x212E.0A Sync SM Event Missed UINT16
1060 0x212E.0B Sync cycle time too small UINT16
1061 0x212E.0C Sync Error BOOL
Tab. 596 Objects
Ref Time
Fig. 110 CiA 402 finite state machine of the servo drive
The states shown in bold in the diagram are stable states of the servo drive and are changed and quer-
ied by a higher-level controller.
The states shown in the diagram in normal font can also be changed by the servo drive itself.
Transitions 3 and 4 can only be triggered by the higher-level controller via the control word. These two
transitions can be triggered via a single command by simultaneously setting bits 0, 1 and 3 in the con-
trol word together in one step.
Commands, State Coding and Transitions
Shutdown 0 x 1 1 0 2,6,8
Switch on 0 0 1 1 1 3
Switch on + enable 0 1 1 1 1 3 + 41)
operation
Disable voltage 0 x x 0 x 7,9,10,12
Quick stop 0 x 0 1 x 7,10,11
Disable operation 0 0 1 1 1 5
Enable operation 0 1 1 1 1 4.16
Fault reset 0à1 x x x x 15
0à1 = positive edge; x = arbitrary
1) Automatic transition to the "Operation enabled" state after execution of the functionality in the "Switched On" state.
Tab. 597 Control Word Commands
Status Transitions
0 Automatic transition after switching on or The self-test and the initialisation of the
resetting the application servo drive are carried out.
1 Automatic transition Communication can be activated.
2 Shutdown command from the higher-level None
controller or local signal
3 Switch on command received from the The load voltage supply should be
higher-level controller or local signal switched on, if possible.
4 Enable operation command received from The drive function is activated and all
the higher-level controller or local signal internal setpoint values are deleted.
5 Disable operation command received The drive function is deactivated.
from the higher-level controller or local
signal
6 Shutdown command received from the The load voltage supply can be switched
higher-level controller or local signal off if possible.
7 Quick stop or disable voltage command None
from the higher-level controller or local
signal
8 Shutdown command from the higher-level The drive function is deactivated. The
controller or local signal load voltage supply can be switched off if
possible.
9 Disable voltage command from the The drive function is deactivated. The
higher-level controller or local signal load voltage supply can be switched off if
possible.
10 Disable voltage or quick stop command The load voltage supply can be switched
from the higher-level controller or local off if possible.
signal
11 Quick stop command from the higher- Quick stop is executed.
level controller or local signal
12 Disable voltage command from the The drive function is deactivated. The
higher-level controller or local signal load voltage supply can be switched off if
possible.
13 Error (see IEC 61800-7-301) The configured error reaction is executed.
14 Automatic transition The drive function is deactivated. The
load voltage supply can be switched off if
possible.
15 Fault reset command from the higher- The error state is reset if there is no active
level controller or local signal error at the servo drive. After leaving the
error state, the error reset bit in the con-
trol word should be deleted by the higher-
level controller.
16 Enable operation command from the high- The drive function is deactivated.
er-order controller
Tab. 598 Transitions
Controller CMMT
RxPDO Mapping
RxPDO
Process data output Object 0x1600
CoE
cyclical Object directory
TxPDO Mapping
TxPDO
Process data input Object 0x1A00
RxPDO1 (Outputs)
Header 0x1600.01 0x1600.02 0x1600.03 0x1600.04 0x1600.05 0x1600.06 0x1600.07 0x1600.08 0x1600.09
TxPDO1 (Inputs)
TxPDO2 (Inputs)
TxPDO3 (Inputs)
Header 0x1AF1.01
760 Receive PDO number Shows the number of objects in the RxPDO.
of objects EtherCAT Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
761 Receive PDO Mapped Specifies the mapping of objects in the RxPDO
Objects EtherCAT è 11.8 Process data communication
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
880 Transmit PDO number Shows the number of objects in the TxPDO.
of objects EtherCAT – 1A00: TxPDO1 mapping, axis 1
– 1AF0: TxPDO2 mapping, EtherCAT, diagnostic history
– 1AF1: TxPDO3 mapping, EtherCAT, DC time stamp
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
881 Transmit PDO Shows the mapping of objects in the TxPDO.
mapped objects Eth- – 1A00: TxPDO1 mapping, axis 1
erCAT è 11.8 Process data communication.
– 1AF0: TxPDO2 mapping, EtherCAT, diagnostic history
è 11.8 Process data communication.
– 1AF1: TxPDO3 mapping, EtherCAT, DC time stamp
è 11.8 Process data communication.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 600 Parameters
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Controller CMMT
CoE OD
Object
SDO download/Download SDO ... request Value
Request (SDO write command)
SDO download expedited request Write command request for 1 … 4 bytes user data
SDO download expedited response Write command acknowledgement with 1 … 4 bytes user
data
SDO download normal request Write command request for 5 … 1,406 bytes user data
SDO download normal response Write command acknowledgement with 5 … 1,406 bytes
user data
Download SDO segmented request Write command request for 1,407 … n bytes user data
Download SDO segmented response Write command acknowledgement with 1,407 … n bytes
user data
Tab. 602 Supported SDO Read Commands
NOTICE!
The controller must not send the next request (request) until the acknowledgement of the write com-
mand (download … response) has been received by the controller.
NOTICE!
The request of the write command (download … request) must not use an object that is mapped in the
"receive PDO mapping (0x1600)" object. The alternating transmission of process data objects PDO
and service data objects SDO would overwrite the data of the object (Value) in an undefined time
sequence.
Controller CMMT
CoE OD
Object
SDO upload/Upload SDO ... request Value
Request (SDO read command)
SDO upload expedited request Read command request for 1 … 4 bytes user data
SDO upload expedited response Read command response with 1 … 4 bytes user data
SDO upload normal request Read command request for 5 … 1,406 bytes user data
SDO upload normal response Read command response with 5 … 1,406 bytes user data
Upload SDO segmented request Read command request for 1,407 … n bytes user data
Upload SDO segmented response Read command response 1,407 … n bytes user data
Tab. 603 Supported SDO Read Commands
NOTICE!
The controller must not send the next request (request) until the response to the read command
(upload … response) has been received by the controller.
Controller CMMT
Abort SDO transfer request SDO Error
Example:
A write command is transmitted to the object "Statusword (0x6041h)" that only has read access. The
abort code "0x06 01 00 02" is returned in the error message.
SDO Abort Codes (SDO abort codes)
The following table describes all the SDO abort codes for SDO communication:
0x05 03 00 00 Protocol error: toggle bit was not revised with segmented SDO transfer.
0x05 04 00 00 SDO protocol time violation
0x05 04 00 01 Protocol error: client/server command specifier invalid or unknown
0x05 04 00 05 Outside the memory range
0x06 01 00 00 Access type is not supported
0x06 01 00 01 Read access to an object that can only be written
0x06 01 00 02 Write access to an object that can only be read
0x06 01 00 03 Subindex cannot be written to, subindex 0 must be 0 for write access
0x06 01 00 04 SDO complete access is not supported for objects with variable length, e.g. with
ENUM object types
0x06 01 00 05 Length of object exceeds size of mailbox
0x06 01 00 06 Object is assigned to RxPDO, SDO download is blocked
0x06 02 00 00 The addressed object does not exist in the object directory.
0x06 04 00 41 The object must not be entered into a PDO (e.g. ro object in RPDO).
0x06 04 00 42 The length of the objects entered in the PDO exceeds the PDO length
0x06 04 00 43 General parameter error
0x06 04 00 47 Overflow of an internal variable/general error
0x06 06 00 00 Access faulty due to a hardware problem
0x06 07 00 10 Protocol error: length of the service parameter does not agree.
0x06 07 00 12 Protocol error: length of the service parameter is too large.
0x06 07 00 13 Protocol error: length of the service parameter is too small.
0x06 09 00 11 The addressed subindex does not exist.
0x06 09 00 30 Value range for parameters was exceeded (only for write access)
7602 Error register CiA402 Shows the error code in accordance with the error register
(CiA402).
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 605 Parameter
Diagnostic messages
No specific diagnostic messages are allocated to the function.
Px. Manufacturer-specific objects: The user or basic unit defined for the parameter is
effective.
7602 0x2196.01 Error register CiA402 UINT8
Tab. 606 Objects
Start
Error free
1 2
4
Error occured
For additional information on the error messages (e.g. error response, cause and measures)
è 9.4.6 Diagnostic messages with information for fault clearance.
11 | 05 | 00198,
11 | 05 | 00200,
11 | 05 | 00201,
11 | 05 | 00202,
11 | 06 | 00203,
11 | 06 | 00285,
11 | 06 | 00300,
11 | 07 | 00204,
11 | 07 | 00205,
11 | 07 | 00271,
11 | 08 | 00206,
11 | 08 | 00207
0x6386 Device Software - Data Set 0x81 06 | 00 | 00070,
06 | 00 | 00081,
06 | 00 | 00082,
06 | 00 | 00083,
06 | 00 | 00084,
06 | 00 | 00085,
06 | 00 | 00248,
06 | 00 | 00252,
06 | 00 | 00313,
06 | 02 | 00086,
06 | 02 | 00087,
06 | 02 | 00088,
06 | 02 | 00089,
06 | 02 | 00090,
06 | 02 | 00091,
06 | 02 | 00273,
06 | 02 | 00274,
06 | 02 | 00275,
06 | 05 | 00097,
06 | 05 | 00098,
06 | 05 | 00099,
06 | 05 | 00100,
06 | 05 | 00101,
06 | 05 | 00102,
06 | 05 | 00103,
06 | 05 | 00104,
06 | 05 | 00105,
06 | 05 | 00106,
06 | 05 | 00107,
06 | 05 | 00108,
06 | 05 | 00290,
06 | 05 | 00291
0x7092 Additional Modules 0x21 18 | 00 | 00092,
18 | 00 | 00093,
18 | 00 | 00094,
18 | 00 | 00095,
18 | 00 | 00096,
18 | 00 | 00227,
18 | 00 | 00318,
18 | 03 | 00235,
18 | 03 | 00301,
18 | 05 | 00239,
18 | 07 | 00365,
18 | 07 | 00366,
18 | 07 | 00367,
18 | 07 | 00368,
18 | 07 | 00369,
18 | 07 | 00370,
18 | 07 | 00371,
18 | 07 | 00372
0x8087 Monitoring 0x81 07 | 01 | 00109,
07 | 01 | 00110,
07 | 01 | 00111,
07 | 01 | 00112,
07 | 01 | 00113,
07 | 01 | 00114,
07 | 01 | 00115,
07 | 01 | 00116,
07 | 01 | 00117,
07 | 01 | 00118,
07 | 01 | 00119,
07 | 01 | 00120,
07 | 02 | 00121,
07 | 02 | 00122,
07 | 02 | 00123,
07 | 02 | 00124,
07 | 02 | 00125,
07 | 02 | 00126,
07 | 02 | 00127,
07 | 02 | 00128,
07 | 02 | 00129,
07 | 02 | 00130,
07 | 02 | 00131,
07 | 02 | 00132,
07 | 02 | 00133,
07 | 03 | 00134,
07 | 03 | 00135,
07 | 04 | 00136,
07 | 04 | 00137,
07 | 05 | 00138
0x8188 Monitoring - Communication 0x11 08 | 00 | 00139,
08 | 00 | 00140,
08 | 00 | 00243,
08 | 03 | 00141,
08 | 03 | 00373,
08 | 04 | 00142,
08 | 04 | 00143,
08 | 04 | 00281,
08 | 09 | 00144,
08 | 09 | 00145,
08 | 09 | 00288,
08 | 09 | 00289,
08 | 09 | 00294,
08 | 09 | 00299,
08 | 09 | 00382,
08 | 12 | 00250,
08 | 12 | 00272
0xF085 Additional Function 0x81 05 | 01 | 00056,
05 | 01 | 00057,
05 | 01 | 00058,
05 | 02 | 00059,
05 | 02 | 00060,
05 | 02 | 00061,
05 | 02 | 00062,
05 | 02 | 00064,
05 | 02 | 00065,
05 | 02 | 00066,
05 | 02 | 00067,
05 | 02 | 00068,
05 | 02 | 00069,
05 | 02 | 00071,
05 | 02 | 00072,
05 | 02 | 00073,
05 | 02 | 00074,
05 | 02 | 00075,
05 | 02 | 00076,
05 | 02 | 00077,
05 | 02 | 00078,
05 | 02 | 00079,
05 | 02 | 00080,
05 | 02 | 00278,
05 | 02 | 00279,
05 | 02 | 00280,
05 | 02 | 00364
0xF089 Additional Function 0x21 09 | 00 | 00146,
09 | 00 | 00147,
09 | 01 | 00148,
09 | 01 | 00149,
09 | 01 | 00150,
09 | 02 | 00151,
09 | 02 | 00152
0xF08C Additional Function 0x81 12 | 01 | 00208,
12 | 01 | 00209,
12 | 01 | 00210,
12 | 01 | 00211,
12 | 01 | 00212,
12 | 01 | 00213
0xF091 Additional Functions 0x21 17 | 01 | 00224,
17 | 01 | 00225,
17 | 01 | 00226
Tab. 608 Emergency error messages
controller and CMMT for transmission via EtherCAT communication. The IP address of the CMMT must
be configured in the controller to enable the Ethernet data to be routed to the CMMT.
Communication via the Ethernet over EtherCAT EoE protocol runs parallel to the acyclic SDO commu-
nication and cyclical process data communication in EtherCAT.
The graph illustrates Ethernet communication between a PC and the CMMT via the "Ethernet over Eth-
erCAT EoE" protocol.
PC Contr ol l er CM MT
Fig. 120 Communication via the "Ethernet over EtherCAT EoE" protocol
Parameter Package
The parameter package is loaded with the change of state from Bootstrap to Init of the EtherCAT state
machine.
12 PROFINET
12.1 General
The product is intended for operation in a PROFINET IO network. Data is transmitted on the basis of
Industrial Ethernet following the IEEE 802.3 protocol. Communication takes place in real time, using
the Real-Time Protocol (RT) or the Isochronous Real-Time Protocol (IRT). The product has two equival-
ent Ethernet interfaces (RJ45) with integrated switch, and therefore supports both star and line topo-
logy. The network can be divided into segments using additional switches and routers. This makes it
possible to structure the network and extend it further.
PROFIdrive
PROFIdrive is a modular drive profile for electrical drive devices with PROFIBUS or PROFINET connec-
tion.
12.2 Standards
This part of the documentation describes the implemented standards and the communications of the
CMMT in a PROFINET network and the PROFIdrive device profile. It is targeted at people who are
already familiar with the bus protocol and device profile.
User Organisation:
Information on the PROFIBUS user organisation (PNO) è www.profibus.com.
PROFIdrive Implementation:
The PROFIdrive implementation of the CMMT is based on the following standard:
12.4 PROFIdrive
12.4.1 General
Devices
The PROFIdrive base model, regardless of the communication system, is based on the following three
basic components and their relationships with one another:
– Controller
A controller is an programmable logic controller (PLC) that is assigned to one or more axes of a
drive system.
– P device
A P device is a drive device that is assigned to one or more controllers.
– Supervisor
A supervisor is, for example, an engineering tool used to administer the data, parameters and dia-
gnostic data of P devices and controllers.
Functional object
A PROFIdrive device contains one or more functional objects that represent specific functions of the
automation system. In the case of P devices the functional object corresponds to a drive object. The
drive object represents the actual drive functions, such as a drive axis consisting of motor, output
stage, closed-loop control and IO functions.
Communication services
The following communication services are used with PROFIdrive:
– Process data (cyclic data exchange)
Process data such as setpoint and actual values along with control and status data are transmit-
ted cyclically. Process data are time-critical and must be transmitted under real-time conditions.
– Parameter data (acyclic data exchange)
Parameter data, such as firmware data or parameters, are transmitted acyclically and only as
required.
– Alarms for diagnostic messages
The servo drive sends diagnostic messages to the controller under real-time conditions.
– Time synchronization data (AC4)
All communication services transmit data in the big-endian format.
AC Application class
11280701 Base value speed Specifies the base value for the velocity application class. The
(user unit) base value in user units is multiplied by the normalized value in
the process data and then gives the internal speed setpoint.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit user defined
11280702 Base value accelera- Specifies the base value for acceleration for the Positioning
tion application class in Tel. 111. The base value is multiplied by the
normalized value in the process data and then gives the internal
acceleration setpoint.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280703 Base value decelera- Specifies the base value for deceleration for the Positioning
tion application class in Tel. 111. The base value is multiplied by the
normalized value in the process data and then gives the internal
deceleration setpoint.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
the drive can be used with this data. The position-setpoint value interpolation continues to take place
in the controller.
Since coordination takes place via the device profile, synchronous operation is required to synchron-
ise the position control in the open-loop controller and the velocity control in the servo drives.
Status S3 Switched On
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition in the process of the stop ramp and is not
triggered by the user.
Status S52 Quick stop
STW1.9 Jogging 2 =0
AND
Standstill detected –
S43 Braking With Ramp Braking ramp ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =0
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for prior setpoint specifica-
tion)
Tab. 650 Status S43
Standstill detected
Tab. 653 Transitions from Status S44
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition and is not triggered by the user.
S45 Traversing Task Interpol- Traversing task posi- ZSW1.10 Target position reached =x
ation tioning ZSW1.12 Traversing task acknow- =x
ledgement
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =x
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for setpoint specification)
Tab. 654 Status S45
x = value depends on sub-status
S451 Traversing Task Active Positioning task act- ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ive ZSW1.12 Traversing task acknow- 0à1
ledgement
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =0
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for setpoint specification)
Tab. 656 Status S451
T305 STW1.6 Activate traversing task 0à1 S452 Intermediate Stop Ramp
T306 Standstill detected S453 Intermediate Stop
Tab. 659 Transitions from Status S452
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition in the process of the intermediate stop
ramp and is not triggered by the user.
T305 has higher priority than T306.
Status S453 Intermediate Stop
T309 STW1.11 Start Homing procedure 0à1 S441 Homing Procedure Run-
ning
T310 STW1.8 Jogging 1 =1 S42 Jogging
OR
STW1.9 Jogging 2 =1
Tab. 661 Transitions from Status S453
T310 has higher priority than T307.
T309 has higher priority than T307.
T308 has higher priority than T307.
T310 has higher priority than T309.
S441 Homing Procedure Run- Homing active ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ning ZSW1.11 Home position set =0
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =1
Tab. 662 Status S441
Standard telegrams
1 Control word 1 STW1 16 –
·
5 Rotational speed setpoint value A NSOLL_A 16
·
6 Rotational speed actual value A NIST_A 16
·
7 Rotational speed setpoint value B NSOLL_B 32
·
8 Rotational speed actual value B NIST_B 32
9 Control word sensor 1 G1_STW 16 –
·
25 Position deviation XERR 32
·
26 Position controller amplification factor KPC 32
32 Record selection SATZANW 16 –
·
34 MDI target position MDI_TARPO- 32
S
35 MDI velocity MDI_VELOC- 32 –
ITY
36 MDI acceleration MDI_ACC 16 –
Manufacturer-specific telegrams
·
28 Actual position value A XIST_A 32
·
101 Torque reduction MOMRED 16
102 Status word messages MELDW 16 –
·
205 Positioning velocity override OVERRIDE 16
220 Positioning control word 1 POS_STW1 16 –
E
303 Warning code WARN_COD- 16 –
E
Tab. 665 Process Data Signals
12.4.5 Telegrams
Process data (input/output data) such as setpoint and actual values along with control and status
data are transmitted cyclically by telegrams. They are transmitted in the big-endian format. The sup-
ported telegrams and their use in the application classes are listed below.
Standard telegrams
1 Rotational speed setpoint value 16 bit AC1
2 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit AC1
3 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder AC1 (RT) and
AC4 (IRT)
4 Velocity setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position sensors AC1 (RT) and
AC4 (IRT)
5 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder and AC4
DSC (Dynamic Servo Control)
6 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position encoders AC4
and DSC (Dynamic Servo Control)
7 Positioning telegram 7 (single positioning with record selection) AC3
9 Positioning telegram 9 (single positioning with record selection AC3
and direct specification, MDI)
Manufacturer-specific telegrams
102 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder and AC1 (RT) and
torque reduction AC4 (IRT)
103 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position encoders AC1 (RT) and
and torque reduction AC4 (IRT)
105 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder, AC4
torque reduction and DSC (Dynamic Servo Control)
106 Velocity setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position encoders, torque AC4
reduction and DSC (Dynamic Servo Control)
111 Single positioning in the operating mode record selection and dir- AC3
ect specification (MDI)
910 Transmission of additional process data (EPD) AC1, AC3 and
è è 12.4.6 Additional Telegram AC4
Tab. 667 Telegrams
Telegram
No. 1 2 3
App. 1 1 1, 4
class
PZD1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1
PZD2 NSOLL_A NIST_A NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B NIST_B
PZD3
PZD4 STW2 ZSW2 STW2 ZSW2
PZD5 G1_STW G1_ZSW
PZD6 G1_XIST1
PZD7
PZD8 G1_XIST2
PZD9
PZD10
PZD11
PZD12
PZD13
PZD14
PZD15
Tab. 668 Telegrams for Velocity Control, Standard Telegrams - Part 1
Telegram
No. 4 5 6
Telegram
No. 102 103 105 106
Telegram
No. 7 9 111
App. 3
class
PZD1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1
PZD2 SATZANW AKTSATZ SATZANW AKTSATZ POS_STW1 POS_ZSW1
PZD3 STW2 ZSW2 POS_STW2 POS_ZSW2
PZD4 MDI_TARPOS XIST_A STW2 ZSW2
PZD5 OVERRIDE MELDW
PZD6 MDI_VELOCI- MDI_TARPOS XIST_A
PZD7 TY
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_A NIST_A
Tab. 672 Standard Telegram 1
Standard Telegram 2
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit
Supported application classes: AC1
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
Tab. 673 Standard Telegram 2
Standard Telegram 3
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder
Supported application classes: AC1 and AC4
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 G1_STW G1_ZSW
6 G1_XIST1
7
8 G1_XIST2
9
Tab. 674 Standard Telegram 3
Standard Telegram 4
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position encoder
Supported application classes: AC1 and AC4
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 G1_STW G1_ZSW
6 G2_STW G1_XIST1
7
8 G1_XIST2
9
10 G2_ZSW
11 G2_XIST1
12
13 G2_XIST2
14
Tab. 675 Standard Telegram 4
Standard Telegram 5
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder and DSC
Supported application class: AC4
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 G1_STW G1_ZSW
6 XERR G1_XIST1
7
8 KPC G1_XIST2
9
Tab. 676 Standard Telegram 5
Standard Telegram 6
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 2 position encoder and DSC
Supported application classes: AC4
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 G1_STW G1_ZSW
6 G2_STW G1_XIST1
7 XERR
8 G1_XIST2
9 KPC
10 G2_ZSW
11 G2_XIST1
12
13 G2_XIST2
14
Tab. 677 Standard Telegram 6
Standard Telegram 7
Single positioning
Supported application class: AC3
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 SATZANW AKTSATZ
Tab. 678 Standard Telegram 7
Standard Telegram 9
Single positioning (with direct specification, only telegram 9)
Supported application class: AC3
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 SATZANW AKTSATZ
3 STW2 ZSW2
4 MDI_TARPOS XIST_A
5
6 MDI_VELOCITY
7
8 MDI_ACC
9 MDI_DEC
10 MDI_MOD
Tab. 679 Standard Telegram 9
Standard Telegram 102
Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 position encoder and torque reduction
Supported application class: AC1 (RT) and AC4 (RT)
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 MOMRED MELDW
6 G1_STW G1_ZSW
7 G1_XIST1
8
9 G1_XIST2
10
Tab. 680 Standard Telegram 102
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 MOMRED MELDW
6 G1_STW G1_ZSW
7 G2_STW G1_XIST1
8
9 G1_XIST2
10
11 G2_ZSW
12 G2_XIST1
13
14 G2_XIST2
15
Tab. 681 Standard Telegram 103
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 MOMRED MELDW
6 G1_STW G1_ZSW
7 XERR G1_XIST1
8
9 KPC G1_XIST2
10
Tab. 682 Standard Telegram 105
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 NSOLL_B NIST_B
3
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 MOMRED MELDW
6 G1_STW G1_ZSW
7 G2_STW G1_XIST1
8 XERR
9 G1_XIST2
10 KPC
11 G2_ZSW
12 G2_XIST1
13
14 G2_XIST2
15
Tab. 683 Standard Telegram 106
1 STW1 ZSW1
2 POS_STW1 POS_ZSW1
3 POS_STW2 POS_ZSW2
4 STW2 ZSW2
5 OVERRIDE MELDW
6 MDI_TARPOS XIST_A
7
8 MDI_VELOCITY NIST_B
9
10 MDI_ACC FAULT_CODE
11 MDI_DEC WARN_CODE
12 Reserved Reserved
Tab. 684 Standard Telegram 111
Additional Telegram
910 Transmission of additional process data (EPD) AC1, AC3 and
AC4
Tab. 685 Additional Telegram
The additional telegram 910 enables the cyclic transmission of additional parameters. All device para-
meters of the servo drive can be transferred.
The additional telegram 910 has a fixed length of 32 bytes for each transmission direction in which up
to 8 parameters can be transmitted.
Parameters with the access right "read/write" can be sent and received by the servo drive (setpoint
value).
Parameters with the "read" access right can only be sent by the servo drive (actual value).
4242101 Number of objects Rx Displays the actuel number of objects that mapped for Rx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242102 Number of bytes Rx Displays the actuel number of bytes that mapped for Rx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242105 Axis ID Rx Specifies the axis ID of the object to be mapped for the extended
process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242106 Data ID Rx Specifies the data ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242107 Data instance ID Rx Specifies the instance number of the object to be mapped for
the extended process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242108 Array ID Rx Specifies the array ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242115 Current axis ID Rx Displays the current axis ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242116 Current data ID Rx Displays the current data ID of the object mapped Rx for the
extended process data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242117 Current data instance Displays the current instance no. of the object mapped for the
ID Rx extended process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242118 Current array ID Rx Displays the current array ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242119 Current data type Rx Displays the data type of the objects mapped for the extended
process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 687 Parameter (Rx data)
4242201 Number of objects Tx Displays the actuel number of objects that mapped for Tx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242202 Number of bytes Tx Displays the actuel number of bytes that mapped for Tx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242205 Axis ID Tx Specifies the axis ID of the object to be mapped for the extended
process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242206 Data ID Tx Specifies the data ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242207 Data instance ID Tx Specifies the instance no. of the object to be mapped for the
extended process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242208 Array ID Tx Specifies the array ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242215 Current axis ID Tx Displays the current axis ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242216 Current data ID Tx Displays the current data ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
424213 Extended process Displays with Extended Process Data = 1 that the extended pro-
data active cess data is active.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
11280204 Extended process Displays which telegram is used for the Extended process data.
data Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 689 Extended Process Data Parameter
Active telegrams
Profile-specific parameters
60100 Shows an overview of the active telegrams. ro Unsigned16
Array ID = Subslot - 1: Array
– Array 0 = Subslot 1, MAP (Module Access
Point)
– Array 1 = Subslot 2, reserved
– Array 2 = Subslot 3, standard telegram
– Array 3 = Subslot 4, additional telegram
(EPD)
– Array 4 .. n = reserved for future additional
telegrams
Possible values:
– 1: Telegram 1
– 2: Telegram 2
– ...
– 910 (0x038E): Additional telegram (EPD)
– 65534 (0xFFFE): No telegram
– 65535 (0xFFFF): MAP in subslot 1
60104 Indicates whether the additional telegram is act- rw Unsigned16
ive. This parameter is written by the higher-level
controller (master). Here means
– 65534 (0xFFFE): Additional telegram not act-
ive
– 910 (0x038E): Additional telegram 910 is act-
ive
Tab. 692 PNUs
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
0à1 Output stage enable (ON) If bit STW1.3 is already active, activation of STW1.0
implements a transition to S4 and therefore switches
on the output stage. As a rule, however, STW1.0 is act-
ive and STW1.3 (output stage enable) is activated.
0 Output stage block (OFF1) – The drive is braked to standstill and then the
power output stage is switched off (OFF1).
– The drive switches to the status S2 Ready For
Switching On.
– If it is coming from the S4 Operation status, it is
braked with the ramp generator ( S51 Ramp stop).
– After standstill is reached the power output stage
is switched off.
Tab. 694 STW1.0
Braking with the OFF1 command can be interrupted with the following commands that trigger a higher
prioritised stop response:
– Fast stop (OFF3) è bit 2, fast stop
– Block ramp generator or reject positioning task è STW1.4
– Block rotational speed setpoint value or activate positioning task è STW1.6
– Enable power output stage è STW1.0. In this case it switches back to the S4 Operation status.
STW1.1 Coast stop (OFF 2)
1 No fast stop A fast stop command is not pending. The motor can be
switched on.
0 Fast stop – The drive is braked to standstill with fast stop.
(OFF3) Then the power output stage is switched off.
– The drive switches to the status S1 Switching On
Inhibited.
– If it is coming from the S4 Operation status, brak-
ing with fast stop ramp (status S52 Quick stop).
Tab. 696 STW1.2
– The fast stop command cannot be interrupted (OFF3).
– The fast stop command can interrupt braking with the OFF1 command. In this case, braking is con-
tinued to standstill with the fast stop ramp.
– If the block operation command (STW1.3) is applied before reaching standstill, the voltage is dis-
connected without waiting for standstill and switched to the S1 Switching On Inhibited status.
– The controller is not yet active in the S2 Ready For Switching On and S3 Switched On closed-loop
controller is not active. Only the energy is already enabled. Therefore, a fast stop ramp is not gen-
erated. It is immediately switched to the S1 Switching On Inhibited status.
STW1.3 Enable operation
0à1 Acknowledge malfunction – With a positive edge the drive attempts to acknow-
ledge pending errors.
The reaction depends on the pending messages.
If the error reaction caused a shutdown of the output
stage, the drive then switches to the status S1 Switch-
ing On Inhibited.
0 No effect –
1 Enable rotational speed set- The rotational speed setpoint value is enabled.
point value
0 Block rotational speed setpoint The input of the ramp generator is set to 0.
value
Tab. 705 STW1.6
1 Do not reject positioning task The current positioning task is not rejected.
0 Reject positioning task – The current positioning task is rejected.
– The drive switches to the status S43 Braking With
Ramp and brakes to standstill with system stop.
– Then the drive switches to the S41 Basic State
Positioning Mode status and remains controlled.
– A new positioning task cannot be started.
Tab. 709 STW1.4
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
0 Ready to be switched on
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
1 Ready for operation
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
2 Operation enabled
– 1: active
– 0: inactive (blocked)
3 Malfunction effective
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
4 Coasting active
– 1: inactive (OFF2 inactive)
– 0: active (OFF2 active)
5 Fast stop active
– 1: inactive (OFF3 inactive)
– 0: active (OFF3 active)
6 Switch-on lock active
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
7 Warning effective
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
1 active (ready to be switched on) The power supply is switched on. The electronics are
initialised. Output stage is active.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S2 Ready For Switching On
– S3 Switched On
– S4 Operation
– S5 Switching off.
0 inactive (not ready to be The drive is in the status S1 Switching On Inhibited.
switched on)
Tab. 716 ZSW1.0
ZSW1.1 Ready to operation
1 Active (ready for operation) The output stage is in the ready for operation status.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S3 Switched On
– S4 Operation
– S5 Switching off
0 Inactive (not ready for opera- The Output stage enable command is not pending
tion) (STW1.0). The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S1 Switching On Inhibited
– S2 Ready For Switching On
Tab. 717 ZSW1.1
ZSW1.2 Operation enabled
0 Inactive The output stage is not active. The drive does not fol-
low the pending setpoint value.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S1 Switching On Inhibited
– S2 Ready For Switching On
– S3 Switched On
– S5 Switching off
Tab. 718 ZSW1.2
ZSW1.3 Fault present
1 Active (not reached) Indicates that the I, M or P limit has not yet been
reached.
0 Inactive (reached or exceeded) Indicates that the I, M or P limit has been reached or
exceeded
Tab. 730 ZSW1.11
The motor travels with specified torque and works against the stop when the stop is reached. If the
torque limit is reached, the status change is reported by ZSW1.11.
ZSW1.12 Holding brake open
1 Motor overtemperature warning A warning is not output if the defined motor temperat-
not effective ure warning threshold is exceeded.
0 Motor overtemperature warning A warning is output if the defined motor temperature
effective warning threshold is exceeded.
Tab. 732 ZSW1.13
1 Warning of power unit thermal Shows that a warning or malfunction is not output in
overload not effective case of thermal overload of the power unit.
0 Warning of power unit thermal Shows that an appropriate warning or malfunction is
overload effective output in case of thermal overload of the power unit.
Tab. 734 ZSW1.15
PNUs of Special Bits for Velocity Mode (ZSW1)
1 Following distance in tolerance The dynamic comparison of the setpoint position with
range the actual position is within the tolerance range. The
tolerance range can be parameterised:
– Damping time position: following error:
Px.462.0.0, PNU 11146.0
Bit Meaning
0…6 Reserved
8 Travel to fixed stop
– 1: activate travel to fixed stop (must be set before reaching the fixed stop).
– 1à0: deactivate travel to fixed stop
9 … 11 Reserved
12 AC4: Master life sign Bit 0
13 AC4: Master life sign Bit 1
14 AC4: Master life sign Bit 2
15 AC4: Master life sign Bit 3
Tab. 744 Control Word 2 (STW2)
Bit Meaning
0…7 Reserved
8 Travel to fixed stop
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
9 … 10 Reserved
11 Output stage active
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
12 AC4: Slave life sign Bit 0
13 AC4: Slave life sign Bit 1
14 AC4: Slave life sign Bit 2
15 AC4: Slave life sign Bit 3
Tab. 747 Status Word 2
ZSW2.8 Move to fixed stop active
1 Active This status bit shows that the positioning task "Travel
to fixed stop" is being executed
è 4.1.3.3.1. Travel top fixed stop (application class 3).
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
Normally the parking of the encoder is not permitted while the drive (S4) is running and
leads to an error of the encoder interface (error code 0x0003 in Gn_XIST2).
15 Acknowledge encoder error
1: Request to reset an encoder error (Gn_ZSW.15)
Tab. 756 Control Word Gn_STW
Detailed information on the mode of operation of the encoder interface
è 12.4.7.11 Status Diagram "Position Feedback Interface".
PNUs Encoder n Control Word (Gn_STW)
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
0 Record selection bit 0 (20) Record selection record 0 to 127 (binary coded). 128
1 Record selection bit 1 (21) records can be selected with these 7 bits (record 0 to
127).
2 Record selection bit 2 (22)
Record 0 can also be used as a record. Because record
3 Record selection bit 3 (23) 0 is also used as "No record active" as a feedback in
4 Record selection bit 4 (24) the status word, it cannot be detected when it is closed
with record 0.
5 Record selection bit 5 (25)
If the target value specification (MDI) is active, the
6 Record selection bit 6 (26) record selection is ignored.
Tab. 762 SATZANW, Bit 0 … 6
Example of Signal Processes with Record Execution
In the following example record 2 is started and executed first. Then record 1 is started and executed.
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
15 MDI active
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
Tab. 765 AKTSATZ
AKTSATZ.0 ... 6 Active traversing block
0 Active positioning record bit 0 Shows the active positioning record (0 … 127).
(20) A record is active if the drive is in the S45 Traversing
1 Active positioning record bit 1 Task Interpolation status.
(21) If a new task is started during the intermediate stop
ramp or during the intermediate stop, the active record
2 Active positioning record bit 2
switches immediately to the new record number.
(22)
If MDI is active or no record is currently active, the
3 Active positioning record bit 3 value 0 is displayed.
(23)
4 Active positioning record bit 4
(24)
5 Active positioning record bit 5
(25)
6 Active positioning record bit 6
(26)
Tab. 766 AKTSATZ, Bit 0 … 6
Example of Signal Processes with Record Execution
In the following example record 2 is started and executed first. Then record 1 is started and executed.
Bit Meaning
0 Positioning
– 1: absolute
– 0: relative
1 … 15 Reserved
Tab. 773 MDI_MOD
MDI_MOD.0 Positioning (Absolute Positioning/Relative Positioning)
Bit Meaning
0 Ramp generator
– 1: inactive
– 0: active
1 Torque utilisation
– 1: < threshold value
– 0: > threshold value
Bit Meaning
MELDW.0 shows how far the setpoint value change to a new velocity setpoint value is complete.
MELDW.1 torque utilization
1 < Threshold value The current torque utilisation is less than the set
torque utilisation threshold or the startup phase is not
yet complete.
0 > Threshold value The current torque utilisation is greater than the set
torque utilisation threshold.
Tab. 778 MELDW.1
This message can determine an overload of the motor in order to initialise a corresponding reac-
tion (e.g. stop motor or reduce load).
The threshold can be parameterised.
– Threshold value torque utilization reached: Px.11280410, PNU 12332.0
MELDW.2 Actual speed <Threshold1
1 Threshold value exceeded The monitored signal of a drive system has exceeded
the specified threshold value.
0 Within the threshold values or The monitored signal of a drive system is within the
message function not active threshold values or the message function is not active.
Tab. 781 MELDW.5
The function monitors any parameter to check whether it exceeds a threshold value.
1 No warning of motor overtem- The temperature in the motor is within the permissible
perature range
0 Warning of motor overtemperat- The temperature in the motor is outside the permiss-
ure ible range
Tab. 783 MELDW.6
The bit returns the value 1 so long as the temperature remains within the permissible range (lower
warning limit < permissible range < upper warning limit).
The limits are formed by combination of threshold value+ hysteresis:
– Lower limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.945.0.0, PNU 11234.0
– Hysteresis lower limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.946.0.0, PNU 11235.0
– Upper limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.949.0.0, PNU 11238.0
– Hysteresis upper limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.9410.0.0, PNU 11782.0
A difference between warning and error cannot be distinguished with this bit. Temperature outside the
permissible range means warning and/or error.
MELDW.7 No warning Overtemperature power output stage
1 No warning of thermal overload The temperature of the cooling element in the power
in power unit unit is within the permissible range
0 Warning of thermal overload in The temperature of the cooling element in the power
power unit unit is outside the permissible range
Tab. 784 MELDW.7
The bit returns the value 1 so long as the temperature remains within the permissible range (warning
limit < permissible range < upper warning limits).
– Lower limit value warning threshold power output stage temperature: Px.9316.0.0, PNU 2797.0
– Upper limit value warning threshold power output stage temperature: Px.9314.0.0, PNU 2795.0
A difference between warning and error cannot be distinguished with this bit. Temperature outside the
permissible range means warning and/or error.
MELDW.8 Speed setpoint / actual deviation in tolerance
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
1 Negative limit switch active Signal status of the negative limit switch
0 negative limit switch active
Tab. 799 POS_ZSW1.8
POS_ZSW1.9 Positive limit switch active
1 Positive limit switch active Signal status of the positive limit switch
0 Positive limit switch inactive
Tab. 800 POS_ZSW1.9
POS_ZSW1.10 Jogging active
Bit Meaning
0 Tracking mode
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
1…4 Reserved
5 Incremental jogging
– 1: incremental
– 0: velocity
6…9 Reserved
10 Touch Probe source
– 1: secondary encoder
– 0: primary encoder
11 Touch Probe edge
– 1: falling edge
– 0: rising edge
12 … 13 Reserved
14 Activate software limit switch
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
15 Activate hardware limit switch
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
Tab. 806 Positioner Control Word 2 (POS_STW2)
1 Falling edge Determines the type of signal edge with which the
0 Rising edge measurement shall be triggered.
1 Activate software limit switch Specifies whether software end position monitoring
0 Deactivate software limit switch should be active or inactive.
Tab. 811 POS_STW2.14
1 Activate hardware limit switch The evaluation of the hardware limit switch is activ-
ated.
0 Deactivate hardware limit The evaluation of the hardware limit switch is deactiv-
switch ated.
Tab. 812 POS_STW2.15
PNUs for Positioner Control Word 2 (POS_STW2)
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
1 Tracking mode active Shows that tracking mode is active (comparison of set-
point position value = actual position value).
0 Tracking mode inactive Tracking mode is inactive.
Tab. 815 POS_ZSW2.0
POS_ZSW2.1 Velocity limiting active
1 Velocity limiting active Shows that velocity limiting is active in the application
limiting manager. The current trajectory is run with lim-
ited velocity.
The velocity limit can be set with the following para-
meter:
– Limit value velocity limiting: Px.1304.0.0,
PNU 11334.0
0 Velocity limiting inactive Shows that velocity limiting is inactive
Tab. 816 POS_ZSW2.1
POS_ZSW2.2 Setpoint available
1 Setpoint value stopped Shows that the setpoint position value is not changed.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is 0.
0 Setpoint value not stopped Shows that the setpoint position value is changed. The
internal setpoint velocity value according to the traject-
ory generator is not equal to 0.
Tab. 817 POS_ZSW2.2
POS_ZSW2.4 Drive moves forward
1 Drive travels forward Shows that the drive travels forward. The internal set-
point velocity value according to the trajectory gener-
ator is > 0.
0 Drive does not travel forward Shows that the drive is stopped or travels backwards.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is £ 0.
Tab. 818 POS_ZSW2.4
POS_ZSW2.5 Drive moves backwards
1 Drive travels backwards Shows that the drive is stopped or travels backwards.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is ≠ 0.
0 Drive does not travel backwards Shows that the drive travels forward. The internal set-
point velocity value according to the trajectory gener-
ator is > 0.
Tab. 819 POS_ZSW2.5
POS_ZSW2.6 Software limit switch minus reached
1 Negative software limit switch Specifies that the negative software limit switch is act-
active ive.
0 Negative software limit switch
not active
Tab. 820 POS_ZSW2.6
POS_ZSW2.7 Software limit switch plus reached
1 Positive software limit switch Specifies that the positive software end position is act-
active ive.
0 Positive software limit switch
not active
Tab. 821 POS_ZSW2.7
1 Actual position £ as position of Specifies whether the actual position value £ or > as
cam switch 0 cam switch position 0.
0 0: actual position > as position
of cam switch 0
Tab. 822 POS_ZSW2.8
POS_ZSW2.9 Position actual value <= cam switch 1
1 Actual position £ as position of Specifies whether the actual position value £ or > as
cam switch 1 cam switch position 1.
0 Actual position > as position of
cam switch 1
Tab. 823 POS_ZSW2.9
POS_ZSW2.10 Direct output 1 via traversing block
1 Direct output 1 active Shows whether direct output 1 is active via positioning
0 Direct output 1 not active record.
1 Direct output 2 active Shows whether direct output 2 is active via positioning
record.
0 Direct output 2 not active
Tab. 825 POS_ZSW2.11
POS_ZSW2.12 Fixed stop reached
1 Fixed stop reached Specifies whether the fixed stop was reached.
0 Fixed stop not reached
Tab. 826 POS_ZSW2.12
1 Fixed stop clamping torque Specifies whether the clamping torque was reached
reached after travel to the fixed stop.
0 Fixed stop clamping torque not
reached
Tab. 827 POS_ZSW2.13
POS_ZSW2.14 Move to fixed stop active
1 Travel to fixed stop active Specifies whether travel to the fixed stop is active.
0 Travel to fixed stop not active
Tab. 828 POS_ZSW2.14
POS_ZSW2.15 Traversing command active
12.4.8 Diagnostics
13 EtherNet/IP
13.1 General
This part of the documentation describes the implemented standards and the communications of the
CMMT in an EtherNet/IP network. It is targeted at people who are already familiar with the bus pro-
tocol.
The Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) is an open standard for industrial networks. EtherNet/IP
is used for cyclical transmission of control and status data (I/O data) as well as acyclic transmission of
parameter data.
EtherNet/IP was developed by Rockwell Automation and the user organisation “ODVA (Open Devi-
ceNet Vendor Association)” and standardised in the international standards series IEC 61158.
EtherNet/IP is based on the general, object-oriented CIP object model.
13.2 Standards
The user organisation of EtherNet/IP is ODVA. The following documents, among others, can be
obtained from this user organisation:
THE CIP NETWORKS LIBRARY: Volume 1 – Com- This document describes the general principles
mon Industrial Protocol (CIP) of the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) (e.g.
transmission).
THE CIP NETWORKS LIBRARY: Volume 2 – Ether- This document describes the general basics and
Net/IP Adaptation of CIP the embedding of EtherNet/IP in the Common
Industrial Protocols (CIP).
THE CIP NETWORKS LIBRARY: Volume 7 – Integra- This document describes the integration of Mod-
tion of Modbus Devices into the CIP Architecture bus devices into a CIP architecture.
Tab. 834 OVDA Standards
Additional information on the user organisation can be found at ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Asso-
ciation) è www.odva.org
Festo provides modules and application notes to facilitate the commissioning of the servo drive with
controllers from various manufacturers è www.festo.com/sp.
Device Identification
Characteristics Contents
Vendor code 26
Vendor Name Festo AG & Co. KG
Product Name Festo CMMT
Product Type 43 (Generic Device)
Product code 65282
Tab. 837 Device Identification
0 Class 1 Revision
2 Max. Instance
3 Number of instances
4 Number of attributes
5 Optional Service list (contains reset
service)
6 Max. Class Attribute
7 Max. Instance Attribute
1 Instance Attrib- 1 Vendor ID
utes 2 Device Type
3 Product Code
4 Major Revision
Minor Revision
5 Status
6 Serial Number
0 Class 1 Revision
2 Max. Instance
3 Number Of Instances
4 Number Of Attributes
100, 101, 102, Instance Attrib- 1 Reserved
110, 111 utes 2 Reserved
3 Data
4 Size
Tab. 840 Assembly Object - 0x04
Connection Manager Object - 0x06
This object is used to set up a connection. The object is instantiated only once.
Device Level Ring Object - 0x47
This object is used to configure a network with the ring topology according to the DLR specification of
EtherNet/IP.
0 Class 1 Revision
1 Instance Attrib- 1 Network Topology
utes – 0 indicates Linear
– 1 indicates Ring
1 Instance Attrib- 2 Network Status
utes – 0 indicates Normal
– 1 indicates Ring Fault
– 2 indicates Unexpected Loop
Detected
– 3 indicates Partial Network Fault
0 Class 1 Revision
2 Max. Instance
1 Instance attrib- 1 802.1Q Tag Enable
utes 2 DSCP PTP Event
3 DSCP PTP General
4 DSCP Urgent
5 DSCP Scheduled
6 High
7 Low
8 Explicit
Tab. 842 Qualtity of Service Object - 0x48
TCP/IP Interface Object - 0xF5
This object is used to configure a TCP/IP network (e.g. IP address, subnet mask and gateway
address).
0 Class 1 Revision
2 Max. Instance
1 Instance Attrib- 1 Status
utes 2 Configuration Capacity
3 Configuration Control
4 Physical Link Object
5 Interface Configuration:
IP-Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Name Server
Name Server 2
Domain Name
6 Host Name
7 Safety Network Number
8 TTL Value
Tab. 843 TCP/IP Interface Object - 0xF5
Ethernet Link Object - 0xF6
This object contains link-specific counters and status information for an Ethernet IEEE 802.3 commu-
nication interface.
Each instance of the object corresponds exactly to one Ethernet IEEE 802.3 communication interface.
The servo drive is a 2-port EtherNet/IP device and can instantiate 2 Ethernet Link objects.
0 Class 1 Revision
2 Max. Instance
1 Instance Attrib- 1 Interface Speed
utes 2 Interface Flags
3 Physical Address
4 Interface Counters
5 Media Counters
6 Interface Control
7 Interface Type
11280701 Base value speed Specifies the base value for the velocity application class. The
(user unit) base value in user units is multiplied by the normalized value in
the process data and then gives the internal speed setpoint.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit user defined
11280702 Base value accelera- Specifies the base value for acceleration for the Positioning
tion application class in Tel. 111. The base value is multiplied by the
normalized value in the process data and then gives the internal
acceleration setpoint.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280703 Base value decelera- Specifies the base value for deceleration for the Positioning
tion application class in Tel. 111. The base value is multiplied by the
normalized value in the process data and then gives the internal
deceleration setpoint.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280402 Acceleration Specifies the acceleration value for the velocity application
class.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280403 Deceleration Specifies the deceleration value for the velocity application
class.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
11280404 Jerk Specifies the value for the jerk for the application speed.
Access read/write
Update effective immediately
Unit user defined
Tab. 845 Parameter
Status S3 Switched On
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition in the process of the stop ramp and is not
triggered by the user.
Status S52 Quick stop
STW1.9 Jogging 2 =0
AND
Standstill detected –
S43 Braking With Ramp Braking ramp ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =0
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for prior setpoint specifica-
tion)
Tab. 876 Status S43
Standstill detected
Tab. 879 Transitions from Status S44
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition and is not triggered by the user.
S45 Traversing Task Interpol- Traversing task posi- ZSW1.10 Target position reached =x
ation tioning ZSW1.12 Traversing task acknow- =x
ledgement
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =x
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for setpoint specification)
Tab. 880 Status S45
x = value depends on sub-status
S451 Traversing Task Active Positioning task act- ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ive ZSW1.12 Traversing task acknow- 0à1
ledgement
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =0
AKTSATZ Bit 15 = setpoint specification
switch (source for setpoint specification)
Tab. 882 Status S451
T305 STW1.6 Activate traversing task 0à1 S452 Intermediate Stop Ramp
T306 Standstill detected S453 Intermediate Stop
Tab. 885 Transitions from Status S452
The "Standstill detected" condition is an internal condition in the process of the intermediate stop
ramp and is not triggered by the user.
T305 has higher priority than T306.
Status S453 Intermediate Stop
T309 STW1.11 Start Homing procedure 0à1 S441 Homing Procedure Run-
ning
T310 STW1.8 Jogging 1 =1 S42 Jogging
OR
STW1.9 Jogging 2 =1
Tab. 887 Transitions from Status S453
T310 has higher priority than T307.
T309 has higher priority than T307.
T308 has higher priority than T307.
T310 has higher priority than T309.
S441 Homing Procedure Run- Homing active ZSW1.10 Target position reached =0
ning ZSW1.11 Home position set =0
ZSW1.13 Drive stopped =1
Tab. 888 Status S441
Instance 102 contains the startup parameterisation via Ethernet/IP (config assembly).
Parameter Meaning
Px.
3030101 Telegram selection
Tab. 891 Process Data Configuration
13.4.4 Telegrams
Telegrams
1 Rotational speed setpoint value 16 bit Velocity
102 Rotational speed setpoint value 32 bit with 1 Velocity
position encoder and torque reduction
111 Single positioning in the operating mode record Positioning
selection and direct specification (MDI)
910 Transmission of additional process data (EPD) Independent of the application
è è 13.4.5 Additional Telegram class
Tab. 892 Telegrams
Telegram
No. 1 102 111
Additional Telegram
910 Transmission of additional process data (EPD) Independent of the application
class
Tab. 894 Additional Telegram
The additional telegram 910 enables the cyclic transmission of additional parameters. All device para-
meters of the servo drive can be transferred.
The additional telegram 910 has a fixed length of 32 bytes for each transmission direction in which up
to 8 parameters can be transmitted.
Parameters with the access right "read/write" can be sent and received by the servo drive (setpoint
value).
Parameters with the "read" access right can only be sent by the servo drive (actual value).
With the help of the CMMT plug-in up to 8 parameters can be mapped in the tabular view of the "Field-
bus" screen in the input and output data.
4242101 Number of objects Rx Displays the actuel number of objects that mapped for Rx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242102 Number of bytes Rx Displays the actuel number of bytes that mapped for Rx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242105 Axis ID Rx Specifies the axis ID of the object to be mapped for the extended
process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242106 Data ID Rx Specifies the data ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242107 Data instance ID Rx Specifies the instance number of the object to be mapped for
the extended process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242108 Array ID Rx Specifies the array ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242115 Current axis ID Rx Displays the current axis ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242116 Current data ID Rx Displays the current data ID of the object mapped Rx for the
extended process data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242117 Current data instance Displays the current instance no. of the object mapped for the
ID Rx extended process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242118 Current array ID Rx Displays the current array ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242119 Current data type Rx Displays the data type of the objects mapped for the extended
process data Rx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
Tab. 896 Parameter (Rx data)
4242201 Number of objects Tx Displays the actuel number of objects that mapped for Tx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242202 Number of bytes Tx Displays the actuel number of bytes that mapped for Tx data.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242205 Axis ID Tx Specifies the axis ID of the object to be mapped for the extended
process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242206 Data ID Tx Specifies the data ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242207 Data instance ID Tx Specifies the instance no. of the object to be mapped for the
extended process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242208 Array ID Tx Specifies the array ID of the object to be mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/write
Update reinitialization
Unit −
4242215 Current axis ID Tx Displays the current axis ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Unit −
4242216 Current data ID Tx Displays the current data ID of the object mapped for the exten-
ded process data Tx.
Access read/−
Update effective immediately
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
0à 1 Output stage enable (ON) If bit STW1.3 is already active, activation of STW1.0
implements a transition to S4 and therefore switches
on the output stage. As a rule, however, STW1.0 is act-
ive and STW1.3 (output stage enable) is activated.
0 Output stage block (OFF1) – The drive is braked to standstill and then the
power output stage is switched off (OFF1).
– The drive switches to the status S2 Ready For
Switching On.
– If it is coming from the S4 Operation status, it is
braked with the ramp generator ( S51 Ramp stop).
– After standstill is reached the power output stage
is switched off.
Tab. 900 STW1.0
Braking with the OFF1 command can be interrupted with the following commands that trigger a higher
prioritised stop response:
– Fast stop (OFF3) è bit 2, fast stop
– Block ramp generator or reject positioning task è STW1.4
– Block rotational speed setpoint value or activate positioning task è STW1.6
– Enable power output stage è STW1.0. In this case it switches back to the S4 Operation status.
STW1.1 Coast stop (OFF 2)
1 No fast stop A fast stop command is not pending. The motor can be
switched on.
0 Fast stop – The drive is braked to standstill with fast stop.
(OFF3) Then the power output stage is switched off.
– The drive switches to the status S1 Switching On
Inhibited.
– If it is coming from the S4 Operation status, brak-
ing with fast stop ramp (status S52 Quick stop).
Tab. 902 STW1.2
– The fast stop command cannot be interrupted (OFF3).
– The fast stop command can interrupt braking with the OFF1 command. In this case, braking is con-
tinued to standstill with the fast stop ramp.
– If the block operation command (STW1.3) is applied before reaching standstill, the voltage is dis-
connected without waiting for standstill and switched to the S1 Switching On Inhibited status.
– The controller is not yet active in the S2 Ready For Switching On and S3 Switched On closed-loop
controller is not active. Only the energy is already enabled. Therefore, a fast stop ramp is not gen-
erated. It is immediately switched to the S1 Switching On Inhibited status.
STW1.3 Enable operation
STW1.9 Jogging 2
1147990 STW1
Tab. 908 Parameter
1 Enable rotational speed set- The rotational speed setpoint value is enabled.
point value
0 Block rotational speed setpoint The input of the ramp generator is set to 0.
value
Tab. 911 STW1.6
1 Do not reject positioning task The current positioning task is not rejected.
0 Reject positioning task – The current positioning task is rejected.
– The drive switches to the status S43 Braking With
Ramp and brakes to standstill with system stop.
– Then the drive switches to the S41 Basic State
Positioning Mode status and remains controlled.
– A new positioning task cannot be started.
Tab. 915 STW1.4
0à1 Start homing If in the status S41 Basic State Positioning Mode
status or the S43 Braking With Ramp:
– Homing is started during rising edge.
0 Stop homing On successful completion of homing (ZSW1.11 = 1,
homing point set):
– The homing is terminated.
– Switch to status S41 Basic State Positioning Mode
With active homing:
– Homing is interrupted.
– The drive is braked to standstill.
– Switch to status S41 Basic State Positioning Mode
Tab. 918 STW1.1
STW1.13 Start block change
0à1 external record change The external record change is triggered by a rising
edge.
0 No effect No effect
Tab. 919 STW1.13
Parameters of Special Bits for Positioning Mode (STW1)
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
0 Ready to be switched on
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
1 Ready for operation
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
2 Operation enabled
– 1: active
– 0: inactive (blocked)
3 Malfunction effective
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
4 Coasting active
– 1: inactive (OFF2 inactive)
– 0: active (OFF2 active)
5 Fast stop active
– 1: inactive (OFF3 inactive)
– 0: active (OFF3 active)
6 Switch-on lock active
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
7 Warning effective
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
Bit Meaning
Velocity mode Positioning mode
1 active (ready to be switched on) The power supply is switched on. The electronics are
initialised. Output stage is active.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S2 Ready For Switching On
– S3 Switched On
– S4 Operation
– S5 Switching off.
0 inactive (not ready to be The drive is in the status S1 Switching On Inhibited.
switched on)
Tab. 922 ZSW1.0
ZSW1.1 Ready to operation
1 Active (ready for operation) The output stage is in the ready for operation status.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S3 Switched On
– S4 Operation
– S5 Switching off
0 Inactive (not ready for opera- The Output stage enable command is not pending
tion) (STW1.0). The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S1 Switching On Inhibited
– S2 Ready For Switching On
Tab. 923 ZSW1.1
ZSW1.2 Operation enabled
0 Inactive The output stage is not active. The drive does not fol-
low the pending setpoint value.
The drive is in one of the following statuses:
– S1 Switching On Inhibited
– S2 Ready For Switching On
– S3 Switched On
– S5 Switching off
Tab. 924 ZSW1.2
ZSW1.3 Fault present
1145990 ZSW1
1145000 ZSW1.0 Ready to switch on
1145010 ZSW1.1 Ready to operation
1145020 ZSW1.2 Operation enabled
1 Active (not reached) Indicates that the I, M or P limit has not yet been
reached.
0 Inactive (reached or exceeded) Indicates that the I, M or P limit has been reached or
exceeded
Tab. 936 ZSW1.11
The motor travels with specified torque and works against the stop when the stop is reached. If the
torque limit is reached, the status change is reported by ZSW1.11.
ZSW1.12 Holding brake open
1 Motor overtemperature warning A warning is not output if the defined motor temperat-
not effective ure warning threshold is exceeded.
0 Motor overtemperature warning A warning is output if the defined motor temperature
effective warning threshold is exceeded.
Tab. 938 ZSW1.13
ZSW1.14 Motor rotation
1 Warning of power unit thermal Shows that a warning or malfunction is not output in
overload not effective case of thermal overload of the power unit.
0 Warning of power unit thermal Shows that an appropriate warning or malfunction is
overload effective output in case of thermal overload of the power unit.
Tab. 940 ZSW1.15
Parameters of Special Bits for Velocity Mode(ZSW1)
1 Following distance in tolerance The dynamic comparison of the setpoint position with
range the actual position is within the tolerance range. The
tolerance range can be parameterised:
– Damping time position: following error: Px.462.0.
– Monitoring window position: following error:
Px.463.0.0
0 Following distance not yet in tol- The dynamic comparison of the setpoint position with
erance range the actual position is not within the parameterised tol-
erance range.
Tab. 942 ZSW1.8
0à1 Active With a rising edge the import of a new position task
(record or direct setpoint value specification) is
acknowledged. The rising edge at ZSW1.12 is the reac-
tion to a rising edge at STW1.6 in in the following
statuses:
– S41 Basic State Positioning Mode
– S451 Traversing Task Active
– S452 Intermediate Stop Ramp
– S453 Intermediate Stop
0 Inactive The positioning task acknowledgement is inactive. The
status bi is set to 0 if:
– STW1.6 = 0, regardless of the current status
– the S4 Operation status is left regardless of
STW1.6
Tab. 945 ZSW1.12
Bit Meaning
0…6 Reserved
8 Travel to fixed stop
– 1: activate travel to fixed stop (must be set before reaching the fixed stop).
– 1à0: deactivate travel to fixed stop
9 … 15 Reserved
Tab. 950 Control Word 2 (STW2)
STW2.8 Traverse to fixed endstop
Parameter Name
Px.
1148080 STW2.8 Traverse to fixed endstop
1148120 STW2.12 ... 15 Master sign of life
Parameter Name
1148990 STW2
Tab. 952 Parameter
Bit Meaning
0…7 Reserved
8 Travel to fixed stop
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
9 … 10 Reserved
11 Output stage active
– 1: active
– 0: inactive
12 … 15 Reserved
Tab. 953 Status Word 2
ZSW2.8 Move to fixed stop active
1 Active This status bit shows that the positioning task "Travel
to fixed stop" is being executed
è 4.1.3.3.1. Travel top fixed stop (application class 3).
Parameter Name
Px.
1146080 ZSW2.8 Move to fixed stop active
Parameter Name
Parameter Name
Px.
11280502 Target velocity NSOLL_A/NSOLL_B
Tab. 957 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
1210 Actual velocity value
Tab. 958 Parameter
Name Description
Name Description
Parameter Name
Px.
231544 Current resolution per revolution for Gn_XIST
231545 Resolution per revolution for Gn_XIST
Tab. 960 Parameter
The device has an instance for each encoder interface. The parameters are allocated to the primary
encoder with instance 0 (the commutation encoder is at encoder interface 1).
Name Description
Name Description
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
Normally the parking of the encoder is not permitted while the drive (S4) is running and
leads to an error of the encoder interface (error code 0x0003 in Gn_XIST2).
15 Acknowledge encoder error
1: Request to reset an encoder error (Gn_ZSW.15)
Tab. 962 Control Word Gn_STW
Detailed information on the mode of operation of the encoder interface
è 13.4.6.10 Status Diagram "Position Feedback Interface".
Encoder n Control Word Parameter (Gn_STW)
Parameter Name
Px.
1149000 Gn_STW.0 ... 3 Request function
1149040 Gn_STW.4 ... 6 Request command
1149070 Gn_STW.7 Mode
1149110 Gn_STW.11 Home position mode
1149120 Gn_STW.12 Trigger mode homing
1149130 Gn_STW.13 Request absolute value cyclically
1149140 Gn_STW.14 Activate parking sensor
1149150 Gn_STW.15 Acknowledge sensor error
1149990 Gn_STW
1149991 Gn_STW Cycle-1
Tab. 963 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
11280609 XIST_A Actual value position
Tab. 964 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
11280604 Target position MDI
Tab. 965 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
11280605 Profile speed MDI
Tab. 966 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
11280606 Acceleration MDI
Tab. 967 Parameter
Parameter Name
Px.
11280607 Deceleration MDI
Tab. 968 Parameter
Bit Meaning
0 Ramp generator
– 1: inactive
– 0: active
1 Torque utilisation
– 1: < threshold value
– 0: > threshold value
2 Actual rotational speed < threshold 1
– 1: value < threshold value
– 0: value > threshold value
3 Actual rotational speed £ threshold 2
– 1: value < threshold value
– 0: value > threshold value
4 Reserved
5 Variable message function
– 1: threshold value exceeded
– 0: within the threshold values or message function not active
Bit Meaning
1 < Threshold value The current torque utilisation is less than the set
torque utilisation threshold or the startup phase is not
yet complete.
0 > Threshold value The current torque utilisation is greater than the set
torque utilisation threshold.
Tab. 971 MELDW.1
This message can determine an overload of the motor in order to initialise a corresponding reac-
tion (e.g. stop motor or reduce load).
The threshold can be parameterised.
– Threshold value torque utilization reached: Px.11280410
MELDW.2 Actual speed <Threshold1
1 Threshold value exceeded The monitored signal of a drive system has exceeded
the specified threshold value.
0 Within the threshold values or The monitored signal of a drive system is within the
message function not active threshold values or the message function is not active.
Tab. 974 MELDW.5
The function monitors any parameter to check whether it exceeds a threshold value.
1 No warning of motor overtem- The temperature in the motor is within the permissible
perature range
0 Warning of motor overtemperat- The temperature in the motor is outside the permiss-
ure ible range
Tab. 976 MELDW.6
The bit returns the value 1 so long as the temperature remains within the permissible range (lower
warning limit < permissible range < upper warning limit).
The limits are formed by combination of threshold value+ hysteresis:
– Lower limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.945.0.0
– Hysteresis lower limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.946.0.0
– Upper limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.949.0.0
– Hysteresis upper limit value warning threshold motor temperature: Px.9410.0.0
A difference between warning and error cannot be distinguished with this bit. Temperature outside the
permissible range means warning and/or error.
MELDW.7 No warning Overtemperature power output stage
1 No warning of thermal overload The temperature of the cooling element in the power
in power unit unit is within the permissible range
0 Warning of thermal overload in The temperature of the cooling element in the power
power unit unit is outside the permissible range
Tab. 977 MELDW.7
The bit returns the value 1 so long as the temperature remains within the permissible range (warning
limit < permissible range < upper warning limits).
– Lower limit value warning threshold power output stage temperature: Px.9316.0.0
– Upper limit value warning threshold power output stage temperature: Px.9314.0.0
A difference between warning and error cannot be distinguished with this bit. Temperature outside the
permissible range means warning and/or error.
381 Specifies the maximum torque of the servo drive for transfer to the config-
uration tool. The maximum torque must always be set the same on the side
of the controller and the servo drive.
526796 Maximum torque symmetrical
1126990 Torque reduction MOMRED
Tab. 984 Parameter
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
1 Negative limit switch active Signal status of the negative limit switch
0 negative limit switch active
Tab. 992 POS_ZSW1.8
POS_ZSW1.9 Positive limit switch active
1 Positive limit switch active Signal status of the positive limit switch
0 Positive limit switch inactive
Tab. 993 POS_ZSW1.9
POS_ZSW1.10 Jogging active
Bit Meaning
0 Tracking mode
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
1…4 Reserved
5 Incremental jogging
– 1: incremental
– 0: velocity
6…9 Reserved
10 Touch Probe source
– 1: secondary encoder
– 0: primary encoder
11 Touch Probe edge
– 1: falling edge
– 0: rising edge
12 … 13 Reserved
14 Activate software limit switch
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
15 Activate hardware limit switch
– 1: activate
– 0: deactivate
Tab. 999 Positioner Control Word 2 (POS_STW2)
POS_STW2.0 Tracking mode
This function is only available in not enabled status. In tracking mode the internal setpoint position
value tracks the actual position value, therefore setpoint position value = actual position value. The
standstill monitoring is deactivated in this operating mode.
1 Falling edge Determines the type of signal edge with which the
0 Rising edge measurement shall be triggered.
1 Activate software limit switch Specifies whether software end position monitoring
0 Deactivate software limit switch should be active or inactive.
Tab. 1004 POS_STW2.14
POS_STW2.15 Activate hardware limit switch
1 Activate hardware limit switch The evaluation of the hardware limit switch is activ-
ated.
0 Deactivate hardware limit The evaluation of the hardware limit switch is deactiv-
switch ated.
Tab. 1005 POS_STW2.15
Parameters of Positioner Control Word 2 (POS_STW2)
Bit Meaning
Bit Meaning
1 Tracking mode active Shows that tracking mode is active (comparison of set-
point position value = actual position value).
0 Tracking mode inactive Tracking mode is inactive.
Tab. 1008 POS_ZSW2.0
1 Velocity limiting active Shows that velocity limiting is active in the application
limiting manager. The current trajectory is run with lim-
ited velocity.
The velocity limit can be set with the following para-
meter:
– Limit value velocity limiting: Px.1304.0.0
0 Velocity limiting inactive Shows that velocity limiting is inactive
Tab. 1009 POS_ZSW2.1
POS_ZSW2.2 Setpoint available
1 Setpoint value stopped Shows that the setpoint position value is not changed.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is 0.
0 Setpoint value not stopped Shows that the setpoint position value is changed. The
internal setpoint velocity value according to the traject-
ory generator is not equal to 0.
Tab. 1010 POS_ZSW2.2
POS_ZSW2.4 Drive moves forward
1 Drive travels forward Shows that the drive travels forward. The internal set-
point velocity value according to the trajectory gener-
ator is > 0.
0 Drive does not travel forward Shows that the drive is stopped or travels backwards.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is £ 0.
Tab. 1011 POS_ZSW2.4
POS_ZSW2.5 Drive moves backwards
1 Drive travels backwards Shows that the drive is stopped or travels backwards.
The internal setpoint velocity value according to the
trajectory generator is ≠ 0.
0 Drive does not travel backwards Shows that the drive travels forward. The internal set-
point velocity value according to the trajectory gener-
ator is > 0.
Tab. 1012 POS_ZSW2.5
POS_ZSW2.6 Software limit switch minus reached
1 Negative software limit switch Specifies that the negative software limit switch is act-
active ive.
0 Negative software limit switch
not active
Tab. 1013 POS_ZSW2.6
POS_ZSW2.7 Software limit switch plus reached
1 Positive software limit switch Specifies that the positive software end position is act-
active ive.
0 Positive software limit switch
not active
Tab. 1014 POS_ZSW2.7
POS_ZSW2.8 Position actual value <= cam switch 0
1 Actual position £ as position of Specifies whether the actual position value £ or > as
cam switch 0 cam switch position 0.
0 0: actual position > as position
of cam switch 0
Tab. 1015 POS_ZSW2.8
POS_ZSW2.9 Position actual value <= cam switch 1
1 Actual position £ as position of Specifies whether the actual position value £ or > as
cam switch 1 cam switch position 1.
0 Actual position > as position of
cam switch 1
Tab. 1016 POS_ZSW2.9
1 Direct output 1 active Shows whether direct output 1 is active via positioning
0 Direct output 1 not active record.
1 Direct output 2 active Shows whether direct output 2 is active via positioning
record.
0 Direct output 2 not active
Tab. 1018 POS_ZSW2.11
POS_ZSW2.12 Fixed stop reached
1 Fixed stop reached Specifies whether the fixed stop was reached.
0 Fixed stop not reached
Tab. 1019 POS_ZSW2.12
POS_ZSW2.13 Fixed stop Clamping torque reached
1 Fixed stop clamping torque Specifies whether the clamping torque was reached
reached after travel to the fixed stop.
0 Fixed stop clamping torque not
reached
Tab. 1020 POS_ZSW2.13
POS_ZSW2.14 Move to fixed stop active
1 Travel to fixed stop active Specifies whether travel to the fixed stop is active.
0 Travel to fixed stop not active
Tab. 1021 POS_ZSW2.14